Ventilador 7200 Manual Servicio PDF

7200 Service Manual
Ve n t i l a t o r System
Part No. 066317

Rev. A
March 2004
Copyright information
Copyright 2004 Puritan-Bennett Corporation. All rights reserved. The 7200 SeriesTM Ventilator System is
manufactured in accordance with Puritan Bennett proprietary information, covered by one or more of the following
U.S. Patents and foreign equivalents: 4,954,799; 5,161,525; 5,271,389; 5,301,921; 5,319,540; 5,339,807; 5,368,019;
and 5,390,666. 7200 Series, RT 200 and PTS 2000 are trademarks of Puritan-Bennett Corporation.
The information contained in this manual is the sole property of Puritan-Bennett Corporation and may not be
duplicated without permission. This manual may be revised or replaced by Puritan-Bennett Corporation at any time
and without notice. You should ensure that you have the most current applicable version of this manual; if in doubt,
contact Puritan Bennett Technical Support group at 800.255.6774, or contact your local Puritan Bennett
representative. While the information set forth herein is believed to be accurate, it is not a substitute for the exercise
of professional judgment.
The ventilator should be operated and serviced only by trained professionals. Puritan Bennett’s sole responsibility
with respect to the ventilator, and its use, is as stated in the limited warranty provided.
Nothing in this manual shall limit or restrict in any way Puritan Bennett’s right to revise or otherwise change or
modify the equipment (including its software) described herein, without notice. In the absence of an express, written
agreement to the contrary, Puritan Bennett has no obligation to furnish any such revisions, changes, or
modifications to the owner or user of the equipment (including its software) described herein.
Authorized Representative:
Puritan-Bennett Corporation Tyco Healthcare UK Limited
4280 Hacienda Drive 154 Fareham Road
Pleasanton, CA 94588 USA Gosport
Phone: 1.800.255.6774 PO13 0AS, UK
Preface
This manual provides information needed to service the Puritan Bennett 7200 Ventilator
System. This manual is intended for use by certified biomedical engineering technicians or
personnel with equivalent experience and training in servicing this type of equipment. It is
recommended that the user complete the Puritan Bennett training class geared specifically to
the 7200 Series Ventilator System.
While this manual covers the ventilator configurations currently supported by Puritan
Bennett, it may not be all-inclusive and may not be applicable to your ventilator. Within the
USA, contact Puritan Bennett at 1.800.255.6774 for questions about the applicability of the
information.
Definitions
This manual uses three special indicators to convey information of a specific nature.
They are:
Warning
Indicates a condition that can endanger the patient or the ventilator operator.
Caution
Indicates a condition that can damage the equipment.
NOTE:
Indicates points of particular emphasis that make operation of the ventilator more efficient
or convenient.
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual i

Warnings, cautions, and notes
Please take the time to familiarize yourself with the warnings, cautions and notes listed here.
They cover safety considerations, special handling requirements, and regulations that govern
the use of the 7200 Series Ventilator System.
To ensure proper servicing and avoid the possibility of physical injury, only qualified
personnel should attempt to service, or make authorized modifications to the ventilator.
The user of this product shall have sole responsibility for any ventilator malfunction
due to operation or maintenance performed by anyone not trained by Puritan Bennett
staff.
• To avoid an electrical shock hazard while servicing the ventilator, be sure to remove all
power to the ventilator by disconnecting the power source and turning off all ventilator
power switches.
• To avoid a fire hazard, keep matches, lighted cigarettes, and all other sources of ignition
(e.g., flammable anesthetics and/or heaters) away from the 7200 Series Ventilator System
and oxygen hoses.
Do not use oxygen hoses that are worn, frayed, or contaminated by combustible materials
such as grease or oils. (Textiles, oils, and other combustibles are easily ignited and burn
with great intensity in air enriched with oxygen.)
In case of fire or a burning smell, immediately disconnect the ventilator from the oxygen
and power supplies.
• When handling any part of the 7200 Series Ventilator System, always follow your hospital
infection control guidelines for handling infectious material.
Puritan Bennett recognizes that cleaning, sterilization, sanitation, and disinfection
practices vary widely among health care institutions. It is not possible for Puritan Bennett
to specify or require specific practices that will meet all needs, or to be responsible for the
effectiveness of cleaning, sterilization, and other practices carried out in the patient care
setting.
Puritan Bennett does recommend that users of its products that require cleaning and
sterilization/disinfection consider the National Standards and Recommended Practices for
Sterilization published by the Association for the Advancement of Medical
Instrumentation (AAMI), as well as the following Center for Disease Control (CDC)
publications: Guidelines for Maintenance of In-use Respiratory Therapy Equipment and
Guidelines for Prevention of Nosocomial Pneumonia.
• Patients on life-support equipment should be appropriately monitored by competent
medical personnel and use of suitable monitoring devices.
The 7200 Series Ventilator System is not intended to be a comprehensive monitoring
device and does not activate alarms for all types of dangerous conditions for patients on
life-support equipment.
• For a thorough understanding of ventilator operations, read the 7200 Series Ventilator
System Operator's Manual before attempting to use the system.
• Before activating any part of the ventilator, be sure to check the equipment for proper
operation and, if appropriate, run the full extended self-test (EST).
• Do not use sharp objects to make selections on the keyboard.
• Federal law (U.S.) restricts the sale of this device to, or by the order of, any physician.
• Check the ventilator periodically as outlined in this manual; do not use if defective.
Immediately replace parts that are broken, missing, obviously worn, distorted, or
contaminated.
• An alternative source of ventilation should always be available when using the 7200
Ventilator System.
ii 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

Manufacturer
Puritan-Bennett Corporation
4280 Hacienda Drive
Pleasanton, CA 94588 USA
1.800.255.6774
Emissions Compliance
Applicable ONLY to those 7200 Series Ventilators bearing the CE label affixed to the rear
panel: the 7200 Ventilator meets the criteria for EN55011 Emissions Classification, CISPR II,
Group I, Class B.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

The 7200 has been tested and found to comply with the limits for medical devices in
accordance with the standards listed under "European Standards Compliance.” These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful EMI in a typical medical
installation.
Certain transmitting devices (cellular phones, walkie-talkies, cordless phones, paging
transmitters, etc.) emit radio frequencies that could interrupt ventilator operation if located
in a range too close to the ventilator. It is difficult to determine when the field strength of
these devices becomes excessive. Practitioners should be aware that radio frequency
emissions are additive. The ventilator must be located a sufficient distance from transmitting
devices to avoid interruption. Do not operate the ventilator in a magnetic resonance imaging
(MRI) environment. Consult with your institution’s biomedical engineering department in
case of interrupted ventilator operation and before relocating any life support equipment.
Because of the proliferation of radio-frequency transmitting equipment and other sources of
electrical noise in the healthcare environment (for example, cellular phones, mobile two-way
radios, electrical appliances), it is possible that high levels of EMI due to close proximity or
strength of source may result in disruption of performance of the 7200 Ventilator.
The 7200 generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with these instructions, may cause harmful interference with other
devices in the vicinity.
Disruption may be evidenced by erratic readings, cessation of operation, or incorrect
functioning of other devices. If this occurs, the site of use should be surveyed to determine
the source of this disruption. The following actions may be taken to eliminate the source:
• Turn equipment in the vicinity off and on to isolate the source of interference.
• Reorient or relocate the 7200.
• Increase the distance between the 7200 and the other equipment.
• Select alternative power receptacle (ac power outlet).
If further assistance is required, contact Puritan Bennett’s Technical Services Department, or
your local Puritan Bennett Representative.
Environmental Protection
Puritan Bennett recommends that customers or technical services personnel follow local
governing ordinances and recycling instructions regarding disposal or recycling of the battery
or other device components.
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual iii
European Standards Compliance
The following statement is applicable only to 7200 Series Ventilators bearing a CE label
affixed to the rear panel.
The application to the ventilator of a label bearing this symbol signifies that the 7200
Ventilator complies with the requirements of IEC 601-1-2, (EMC Collateral Standard),
including the E-field susceptibility requirements at a level of 3 V per meter, at frequencies
from 26 MHz to 1 GHz, and the ESD requirements of this standard. However, even at this
level of device immunity, certain transmitting devices (cellular phones, walkie-talkies,
cordless phones, paging instruments, etc.) emit radio frequencies which could interrupt
ventilator operation if located too close to the ventilator. It is difficult to determine when the
field strength of these devices becomes excessive.
Practitioners should be aware that radio frequency emissions are additive, and that the
ventilator must be located a sufficient distance from transmitting devices to avoid
interruption. Do not operate the ventilator in a magnetic imaging (MRI) environment.
Section 3 describes possible ventilator alarms and what to do if they occur. Consult with your
institutions’s biomedical engineering department in case of interrupted ventilator operation,
and before relocating any life support equipment.
Where this symbol is present on the 7200 Series Ventilator, it signifies that the ventilator
complies with the requirements of Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC and with the
requirements of Council Directive 89/336/EEC relating to Electromagnetic compatibility.
Where the CE symbol is not present on the ventilator, the statements appearing on this page
relating to compliance with the requirements of IEC 601-1-2 (EMC Collateral Standard), and
of Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC and with the requirements of Council Directive 89/
336/EEC related to Electromagnetic compatibility do NOT apply. Please verify the existence
of this symbol by observing a label affixed to the ventilator rear panel.
Customer assistance
For further assistance call Puritan Bennett Technical Support group at 800.255.6774 or
contact your local Puritan Bennett representative.
iv 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

CONTENTS
1 General Information
1.1 Safety ................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 General Product Description.............................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Configuration Information ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.3.1 Configuration Differences .......................................................................................... 1-2
1.3.2 Model Differences ..................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.3 Viewing Ventilator Software Information ................................................................... 1-4
1.3.4 Accessories ................................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3.5 Options ..................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Specifications and Other Technical Data ............................................................................ 1-9
1.5 Recommended Tools and Test Equipment ....................................................................... 1-14
1.6 Service Kits ...................................................................................................................... 1-17
1.7 Controls and Indicators ................................................................................................... 1-19
1.8 Location of Serial Number ............................................................................................... 1-26
1.9 Warranty and Service Information ................................................................................... 1-26
1.10 Reference Documentation ............................................................................................. 1-26
2 Theory of Operation
2.1 Overview of Ventilator Operation ...................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Pneumatic System ............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2.1 Wall Gas Supply System ............................................................................................ 2-8
2.2.1.1 Component Descriptions................................................................................... 2-8
2.2.1.2 System Operation.............................................................................................. 2-9
2.2.2 Motor Compressor System ...................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.2.1 Component Descriptions................................................................................. 2-11
2.2.2.2 System Operation (Figure 2-5) ........................................................................ 2-12
2.2.3 Flow Control System ............................................................................................... 2-14
2.2.3.2 System Operation (Figure 2-7) ........................................................................ 2-15
2.2.4 Safety Valve System ................................................................................................. 2-17
2.2.4.2 System Operation............................................................................................ 2-18
2.2.5 Patient System......................................................................................................... 2-19
2.2.6 Exhalation System ................................................................................................... 2-23
2.2.6.2 System Operation (Figure 2-14) ...................................................................... 2-24
2.2.7 PEEP/CPAP System .................................................................................................. 2-26
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual v

Contents
2.2.7.2 System Operation (Figure 2-16) .......................................................................2-27
2.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................2-32
2.3.2 The ac Power Distribution: Utility Panel....................................................................2-33
2.3.3 The dc Power Supply and Distribution: Power Supplies and Batteries .......................2-34
2.3.3.1 +5 V, +12 V, and ±15 V Supplies ......................................................................2-34
2.3.3.2 Power Fail Module ...........................................................................................2-38
2.3.3.3 Isolation Transformer .......................................................................................2-38
2.3.3.4 Batteries...........................................................................................................2-38
2.3.4 CPU, Memory, and Associated Circuits: MegaCPU PCB or 80188 CPU PCB..............2-40
2.3.5 CPU and Associated Circuits: 8088 CPU PCB............................................................2-42
2.3.6 Memory: Memory PCB (8088-Based Ventilators Only) .............................................2-44
2.3.7 DCI-Display Controller PCB (Used in 80188-Based Units Only).................................2-46
2.3.8 Display Controller PCB (Used in 8088-Based Units Only)..........................................2-48
2.3.9 Keyboard, Displays, and Drivers: Front Panel Display PCB ........................................2-50
2.3.10 A/D and D/A Converter: Conversion PCB ...............................................................2-55
2.3.11 Interface PCB .........................................................................................................2-57
2.3.12 Pulse Oximetry PCB Assembly ................................................................................2-62
2.3.12.1 General Principle of Operation .......................................................................2-62
2.3.12.2 Operation of the Sensor .................................................................................2-62
2.3.12.3 How Pulse Oximetry Is Implemented in the 7200 Series Ventilator .................2-64
2.4 Operational Descriptions .................................................................................................2-65
2.4.1 Breath Delivery ........................................................................................................2-66
2.4.1.1 Inspiration........................................................................................................2-66
2.4.2 I/O Device Operation ...............................................................................................2-78
2.4.2.1 Keyboard Operation (Figure 2-46) ...................................................................2-78
2.4.2.2 20-Character Display Operation (Figure 2-47)..................................................2-79
2.4.2.3 Numeric Display Operation (Figure 2-48).........................................................2-80
2.4.2.4 LED Indicators Operation (Figure 2-49) ............................................................2-81
2.4.2.5 Alarm Summary Display Operation (Figure 2-50) .............................................2-83
2.4.2.6 Audio Alarm Operation (Figure 2-51) ...............................................................2-83
2.4.2.7 Analog Meter Operation (Figure 2-52) .............................................................2-83
2.4.2.8 Nurse Call Operation (Figure 2-53) ..................................................................2-87
2.4.2.9 A/D Conversion (Figure 2-54) ..........................................................................2-87
2.4.2.10 Proportional Solenoid Valve Operation (Figure 2-55)......................................2-87
2.4.3 Emergency Operating Modes...................................................................................2-92
2.4.3.1 Bus Timeout (BTO) (Figure 2-56) .....................................................................2-92
2.4.3.2 Power Failure (Figure 2-57) ..............................................................................2-93
2.4.3.3 Watchdog Timeout (Figure 2-58).....................................................................2-96
2.4.3.4 Initialization (Figure 2-59) ................................................................................2-98
2.4.3.5 Back-up Ventilation (Figure 2-60)...................................................................2-100
2.4.3.6 Safety Valve Open (Figure 2-61).....................................................................2-103
2.4.3.7 Wall Air-to-Compressor Switchover (Figure 2-62) ...........................................2-104
2.4.3.8 Apnea Ventilation...........................................................................................2-104
2.4.3.9 Disconnect Ventilation ...................................................................................2-105
vi 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

Contents
3 Installation and Assembly
3.1 Ventilator DIP Switches...................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Checking DIP Switch Settings .................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Setting DIP Switches.................................................................................................. 3-4
3.2 Installing 7202 Display ...................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3 Installing Remote Nurse Call.............................................................................................. 3-7
3.4 Installing Pulse Oximetry Extension Cable.......................................................................... 3-8
3.5 Installing Printer .............................................................................................................. 3-10
3.6 Assembling Ventilator Cart .............................................................................................. 3-10
3.7 Installing Flex Arm ........................................................................................................... 3-10
3.8 Installing Patient System.................................................................................................. 3-11
3.9 Connecting Gas Supplies ................................................................................................. 3-11
3.10 Connecting Electrical Power .......................................................................................... 3-12
3.11 Installation Checkout ..................................................................................................... 3-13
3.12 Preparing for Patient Use ............................................................................................... 3-13
4 Periodic Maintenance
4.1 Periodic Maintenance Details............................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Daily: Gas Supply Water Traps and Filters (Air and Oxygen)....................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Daily: Exhaled Gas Collector Vial................................................................................ 4-3
4.1.3 Between Patients (or Every 15 Days, at a Minimum): Bacteria Filters in Patient System ...
4-3
4.1.4 Every 250 Hours: Cooling Fan Filter ........................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Every 2,500 Hours: Volume Calibration ..................................................................... 4-4
4.1.6 Every 2,500 and 10,000 Hours: Preventive Maintenance ........................................... 4-4
4.1.7 Annually: Reusable Bacteria Filters ............................................................................. 4-7
4.2 Cleaning and Sterilization .................................................................................................. 4-8
5 Self-Tests
5.1 Introduction ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1.1 Structure of POST.............................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1.2 When Is POST Run............................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.1.3 If POST Fails ...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Running POST ........................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 Error Handling........................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.3.1 How POST Reports Errors .................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.3.2 How the Ventilator Responds to Errors............................................................... 5-4
5.3 Extended Self-Test (EST) .................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3.1.1 When To Run EST.............................................................................................. 5-5
5.3.1.2 Hardware Requirements .................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.1.3 What If EST Fails ................................................................................................ 5-5
5.3.1.4 Quick EST (QUEST)............................................................................................ 5-6
5.3.2 Starting EST............................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.3 Running EST Test Routines ........................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.3.1 Prompts ............................................................................................................ 5-9
5.3.3.2 Operator Errors.................................................................................................. 5-9
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual vii
Contents
5.3.3.3 Power Loss During EST.....................................................................................5-10
5.3.3.4 Displays ...........................................................................................................5-10
5.3.4 Error Handling .........................................................................................................5-12
5.3.4.1 If an EST Test Fails ............................................................................................5-12
5.3.4.2 If the Entire EST Fails ........................................................................................5-13
5.3.5 Exiting EST...............................................................................................................5-13
5.3.5.1 During Test Routine Execution .........................................................................5-13
5.3.5.2 After the Completion of EST.............................................................................5-14
5.3.6 Restarting EST ..........................................................................................................5-14
5.3.7 Printing an EST Status Report ...................................................................................5-14
5.3.7.2 Generating The Report.....................................................................................5-15
5.3.8 Viewing Data from Most Recent EST Run .................................................................5-16
5.3.9 Viewing Previous Error Codes ...................................................................................5-17
5.3.10 Clearing Error Codes from Battery-Backed RAM .....................................................5-18
6 Error Codes
6.1 Introduction.......................................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 POST Error Codes .....................................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Soft Error Codes (Table 6-3) .......................................................................................6-1
6.1.3 EST Error Codes (Table 6-4) .......................................................................................6-1
6.1.4 Communications Error Codes (Table 6-5)...................................................................6-2
6.1.5 Fault Codes................................................................................................................6-2
6.2 Interpreting Error Codes.....................................................................................................6-2
7 Performance Verification
7.1 When To Run .....................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Test Equipment and Service Material Required ...................................................................7-1
7.3 Preliminary Ventilator Cleaning and Inspection ..................................................................7-3
7.4 Preliminary Ventilator Setup ...............................................................................................7-4
7.5 Preliminary Test Instrument Setup......................................................................................7-4
7.5.1 PTS 2000 and BreathLab PTS Software Setup .............................................................7-4
7.5.2 RT-200 Setup .............................................................................................................7-6
7.6 Performance Verification Procedures ..................................................................................7-6
7.6.1 Electrical Safety Test (Test 1) ......................................................................................7-7
7.6.2 Power-On Self-Test (POST) (Test 2) ............................................................................7-8
7.6.3 Total Extended Self-Test (EST) (Test 3) ....................................................................7-8
7.6.4 Battery-Backed RAM Test (Test 4)...............................................................................7-9
7.6.5 Lamp Test (Test 5) ...................................................................................................7-11
7.6.6 Analog Output Connector Test (Test 6) ...................................................................7-14
7.6.7 Power Supply Test (Test 7).......................................................................................7-16
7.6.8 Keyboard Test (Test 8) .............................................................................................7-18
7.6.9 Gas Supply System Test (Test 9)...............................................................................7-19
7.6.10 Peak Inspiratory Flow Test (Test 10) .......................................................................7-21
7.6.11 High-Pressure Limit Alarm, Alarm Volume Control,
and Nurse’s Call Relay Test (Test 11).............................................................................7-23
viii 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
Contents
7.6.12 Gas Volume Accuracy Test (Test 12) ...................................................................... 7-25
7.6.13 Sensitivity Accuracy Test (Test 13) ......................................................................... 7-27
7.6.14 PEEP System Test (Test 14) .................................................................................... 7-28
7.6.15 Oxygen Percentage Accuracy Test (Test 15) .......................................................... 7-31
7.6.16 Heated Exhalation Bacteria Filter and Power
Disconnect Alarm Test (Test 16) ................................................................................... 7-33
7.7 Returning Ventilator to Operation ................................................................................... 7-34
7.8 Troubleshooting .............................................................................................................. 7-34
8 Repair: Introduction
8.1 How To Use the Repair Sections ........................................................................................ 8-1
8.2 General Repair Safety......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.3 General Repair Information................................................................................................ 8-2
8.3.1 Repair-Related Inspection .......................................................................................... 8-2
8.3.2 Repair-Related Cleaning............................................................................................. 8-2
8.3.3 Electrical Cables and Pneumatic Tubing..................................................................... 8-3
8.3.4 Adhesive Use ............................................................................................................. 8-3
8.3.5 Repainting and Touch-up .......................................................................................... 8-4
8.3.6 Replacement Part Ordering ...................................................................................... 8-4
8.3.7 Post-Repair ................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.4 Electrostatic Discharge Control .......................................................................................... 8-4
8.4.1 General Information .................................................................................................. 8-4
8.4.2 Procedures and Precautions ....................................................................................... 8-5
9 Repair: Cabinet Assembly

9.1 Left Panel .......................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Electronics Compartment Fan Filter ................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.1 In Unit with Removable Louver Panel......................................................................... 9-2
9.2.2 In Unit with One-Piece, Nonremovable Left Panel...................................................... 9-3
9.3 Electronics Compartment Fan............................................................................................ 9-4
9.3.1 In Unit with Removable Louver Panel......................................................................... 9-4
9.3.2 In Unit with One-Piece, Nonremovable Left Panel...................................................... 9-6
9.4 Corner Panel ..................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.5 Pulse Oximetry Extension Cable and Retainers................................................................... 9-8
9.6 Rail Tag ........................................................................................................................... 9-10
9.7 Removal/Installation of Ventilator Cabinet Assembly........................................................ 9-11
10 Repair: Pneumatic Chassis Assembly

10.1 Removal/Installation of Pneumatic Chassis Assembly ..................................................... 10-1
10.2 Cleaning of Pneumatic Chassis Assembly ....................................................................... 10-3
10.3 Oxygen and Air Water Trap/Filter Assemblies................................................................. 10-4
10.3.1 Removal/Installation .............................................................................................. 10-4
10.3.2 Disassembly/Assembly ........................................................................................... 10-5
10.4 Oxygen and Air Flow Sensor Assemblies (Q1/T1 and Q2/T2)......................................... 10-7
10.4.1 Removal ................................................................................................................ 10-7
10.4.2 Installation............................................................................................................. 10-8
10.4.3 Cleaning................................................................................................................ 10-9
10.4.4 Inspection ............................................................................................................. 10-9
10.5 Solenoid Valves SOL3 Through SOL8........................................................................... 10-10
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual ix

Contents
10.6 Back-up Ventilator (BUV) Pressure Switch (PS4)............................................................10-11
10.7 Oxygen and Air Screen Filters (F10 and F11) ................................................................10-11
10.8 Air and Oxygen Gas Supply Assemblies (Pressure Switch PS1
or PS2, Check Valve CV1 or CV2, and Regulator REG1 or REG2).....................................10-12
10.8.1 Testing REG1 or REG2 Outlet Pressure..................................................................10-12
10.8.2 Removal/Installation.............................................................................................10-13
10.8.3 High Pressure Leak Test........................................................................................10-14
10.8.4 REG1 or REG2 Adjustment ...................................................................................10-16
10.9 Pressure Transducer PCB (P1, P2, and DP)....................................................................10-19
10.10 Proportional Valve Group (PSOL1, PSOL2, SOL1, and SOL2)......................................10-19
10.10.1 Removal of Proportional Valve Group.................................................................10-19
10.10.2 Service of SOL1 and SOL2..................................................................................10-19
10.10.3 SOL1 and SOL2 Coil Test ...................................................................................10-20
10.10.4 SOL1 and SOL2 Mechanical Test........................................................................10-20
10.10.5 Installation of Proportional Valve Group .............................................................10-21
10.11 Safety Valve/Check Valve (SV/CV3) Assembly .............................................................10-21
10.12 Safety Valve Back Pressure Regulator (REG4) ..............................................................10-21
10.12.1 Removal/Installation...........................................................................................10-21
10.12.2 Adjustment ........................................................................................................10-22
10.13 Adjustable Restrictor (R3) Adjustment ........................................................................10-25
11 Repair: Power Supply Assembly

11.1 Testing Output Voltages ................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Calibration of Output Voltages.......................................................................................11-1
11.3 Calibration of Power Fail Trip Point ................................................................................11-3
11.4 Removal/Installation of Top-Mounted Surge Suppressor ................................................11-4
11.4.1 100/115 V Surge Suppressor..................................................................................11-4
11.4.2 220/240 V Surge Suppressor..................................................................................11-6
11.5 Removal/Installation of Power Supply Assembly .............................................................11-7
11.6 Removal/Installation of Power Supply Modules and Isolation Transformer ......................11-8
11.6.1 +5 V Module ..........................................................................................................11-8
11.6.2 +12 V Module ........................................................................................................11-8
11.6.3 ±15 V Module ........................................................................................................11-8
11.6.4 Power Fail Module ...............................................................................................11-10
11.6.5 Isolation Transformer (220/240 V Power Supply) .................................................11-10
12 Repair: Utility Panel Assembly

12.1 Removal/Installation of Utility Panel Assembly ................................................................12-1
12.2 Power Switch .................................................................................................................12-5
12.3 Ventilator Elapsed Time Meter........................................................................................12-5
12.4 Circuit Breaker ...............................................................................................................12-5
12.5 Power Line Filter ............................................................................................................12-5
12.6 Power Relay ...................................................................................................................12-6
12.7 Utility Panel Harness.......................................................................................................12-7
12.7.1 Removal/Installation...............................................................................................12-7
12.7.2 Fuse Replacement ..................................................................................................12-8
12.8 220/240 V Line Voltage Filter Receptacle (Later Versions)...............................................12-9
12.9 Batteries.........................................................................................................................12-9
x 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

Contents
13 Repair: Exhalation Compartment
13.1 Exhalation Bacteria Filter................................................................................................ 13-1
13.1.1 In Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment ........................................................ 13-1
13.1.2 In Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment............................................................ 13-3
13.2 Exhalation Sensor Assembly (Q3/T3) and Check Valve (CV5) Assembly.......................... 13-5
13.3 Internal Exhalation Valve ............................................................................................... 13-9
13.4 Bacteria Filter Heater ..................................................................................................... 13-9
13.4.2 In Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment.......................................................... 13-10
13.5 Audio Alarm ................................................................................................................ 13-12
13.6 Removal/Installation of Exhalation Compartment ........................................................ 13-14
13.6.1 Bottom-Loading .................................................................................................. 13-14
13.6.2 Front-Loading...................................................................................................... 13-14
14 Repair: Card Cage Assembly

14.1 Accessing Motherboard PCB Connectors ....................................................................... 14-2
14.2 Removal, Disassembly, and Installation of EMI Filter Connector Plate............................. 14-3
14.3 Removal/Installation of PCBs ......................................................................................... 14-4
14.4 Removal/Installation of EPROMs and PALs ................................................................... 14-11
14.4.1 Removal .............................................................................................................. 14-11
14.4.2 Installation........................................................................................................... 14-15
14.5 Calibration of Battery Charger Voltage (R84 on Interface PCB) .................................... 14-17
14.6 Calibration of BUV Volumes (R85 and R86 on Interface PCB) ....................................... 14-20
14.7 Removal/Installation of Card Cage Assembly ............................................................... 14-21
15 Repair: Console Assembly

15.1 Alarm Summary Lamps (Basic Console Only)................................................................. 15-1
15.2 Raising Console ............................................................................................................. 15-2
15.3 PEEP/CPAP Regulator (REG5) ......................................................................................... 15-4
15.4 Analog Meter ................................................................................................................ 15-7
15.4.2 Adjustment............................................................................................................ 15-8
15.5 Front Panel Display PCB............................................................................................... 15-11
15.5.1 In Enhanced-Plus Console.................................................................................... 15-11
15.5.2 In Enhanced Console........................................................................................... 15-17
15.5.3 In Basic Console .................................................................................................. 15-19
15.6 Keyboard Assembly ..................................................................................................... 15-21
15.6.1 In Enhanced-Plus Console.................................................................................... 15-21
15.6.2 In Enhanced Console........................................................................................... 15-21
15.6.3 In Basic Console .................................................................................................. 15-21
15.7 Pulsed Alarm PCB Assembly......................................................................................... 15-22
15.8 Main Flow Bacteria Filter Compartment Door .............................................................. 15-24
15.9 Removal/Installation of Console Assembly ................................................................... 15-24
15.9.1 Enhanced-Plus ..................................................................................................... 15-24
15.9.2 Enhanced or Basic ............................................................................................... 15-25
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xi

Contents
16 Repair: Compressor Pedestal Assembly
16.1 Pedestal Access Panel Cover and Inner Access Panel .......................................................16-1
16.2 Compressor Fan Filter ...................................................................................................16-2
16.3 Compressor Inlet Filter (F5) ............................................................................................16-2
16.4 Compressor Circuit Breaker ............................................................................................16-3
16.5 Compressor Power Relay................................................................................................16-4
16.5.1 Testing...................................................................................................................16-4
16.6 Compressor Power Line Filter .........................................................................................16-5
16.7 Compressor Elapsed Time Meter ....................................................................................16-5
16.8 Compressor Back Pressure Regulator (REG3) .................................................................16-6
16.8.1 Testing Outlet Pressure ..........................................................................................16-6
16.8.3 Adjustment ............................................................................................................16-7
16.9 Compressor Pressure Switch (PS3) .................................................................................16-8
16.9.1 Testing PS3 and REG3 ............................................................................................16-8
16.9.2 Removal/Installation.............................................................................................16-10
16.10 Compressor Unloading Solenoid (SOL9) ....................................................................16-10
16.11 Compressor Inlet Silencer...........................................................................................16-11
16.12 Compressor Outlet Filter (F6) .....................................................................................16-11
16.13 Compressor Compartment Fan (Attached to Divider).................................................16-11
16.13.2 Inspection ..........................................................................................................16-11
16.14 Compressor and Shock Mounts..................................................................................16-13
16.14.1 Testing...............................................................................................................16-13
16.14.2 Removal.............................................................................................................16-13
16.14.3 Installation .........................................................................................................16-13
16.15 Compressor Pedestal Base Fan (100, 220, and 240 V ac Units Only) ..........................16-14
16.15.2 Inspection ..........................................................................................................16-14
16.16 Heat Exchanger..........................................................................................................16-15
16.17 Compressor Check Valve (CV4) ..................................................................................16-15
16.18 Pedestal Base Assembly ..............................................................................................16-15
16.19 Casters.......................................................................................................................16-15
16.20 Exit Plenum Cover .....................................................................................................16-17
16.21 Bumpers ....................................................................................................................16-17
16.21.1 Multipiece Style with Ribbed Corners.................................................................16-17
16.21.2 One-Piece Style..................................................................................................16-17
16.22 Removal/Installation of Compressor Pedestal Assembly .............................................16-18
17 Repair: Ventilator Pedestal Assembly

17.1 Removal/Installation of Ventilator Pedestal Assembly......................................................17-1
17.2 Pedestal Access Panel Cover and Inner Access Panel .......................................................17-1
17.3 Bumpers .......................................................................................................................17-3
17.3.1 Multipiece Style with Ribbed Corners.....................................................................17-3
17.3.2 One-Piece Style......................................................................................................17-3
17.4 Casters...........................................................................................................................17-3
xii 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
Contents
18 Repair: Ventilator Cart Assembly
18.1 Removal/Installation of Ventilator Cart Assembly ........................................................... 18-1
18.2 Hose Management Bracket............................................................................................ 18-1
18.3 Casters ......................................................................................................................... 18-2
18.4 Bumpers........................................................................................................................ 18-2
18.5 Ventilator Cart Drawer................................................................................................... 18-4
19 Repair: Panels and Connector Bracket

19.1 Top Cabinet Panel and Top Cover ................................................................................. 19-1
19.2 Back Panel Assembly and Inner Back Panel ................................................................... 19-4
19.2.2 Repair.................................................................................................................... 19-4
19.3 Connector Bracket Assembly ........................................................................................ 19-6
19.4 Connector Bracket Cable/Harness Assemblies ............................................................... 19-8
20 7202 Display
20.1 Description.................................................................................................................... 20-1
20.1.1 Overview............................................................................................................... 20-1
20.1.3 Specifications ........................................................................................................ 20-7
20.1.4 Screens.................................................................................................................. 20-7
20.1.4.1 Patient Data Monitoring Screen..................................................................... 20-7
20.1.4.2 Ventilator Settings 1 Screen........................................................................... 20-8
20.1.4.3 Ventilator Settings 2 Screen........................................................................... 20-9
20.1.4.4 Alarm Screen ............................................................................................... 20-10
20.1.4.5 <++> Key Menu........................................................................................... 20-11
20.1.4.6 Quick EST Screen......................................................................................... 20-12
20.1.4.7 Total EST Screen.......................................................................................... 20-13
20.2 Operation ................................................................................................................... 20-14
20.2.1 Lamp Test ........................................................................................................... 20-14
20.2.2 Normal Operation ............................................................................................... 20-14
20.2.3 Error Messages .................................................................................................... 20-14
20.2.4 <++> Key Functions ............................................................................................. 20-14
20.2.5 Responding to Alarms.......................................................................................... 20-14
20.2.6 Quick and Total EST ............................................................................................ 20-14
20.3 Service......................................................................................................................... 20-15
20.3.1 Required Tools..................................................................................................... 20-15
20.3.2 Cleaning.............................................................................................................. 20-15
20.3.3 Pre-Service Procedures......................................................................................... 20-15
20.3.3.1 Removing the Display (7200a Ventilator equipped with a printer) ............... 20-16
20.3.4 Rear Housing ....................................................................................................... 20-16
20.3.4.1 Removing the Housing ................................................................................ 20-16
20.3.4.2 Replacing the Rear Housing ......................................................................... 20-19
20.3.5 Printed Circuit Board (PCB) Assembly .................................................................. 20-20
20.3.5.1 Disassembly................................................................................................. 20-20
20.3.5.2 Reassembly.................................................................................................. 20-25
20.3.6 Swivel Arm Assembly........................................................................................... 20-27
20.3.6.1 Disassembly................................................................................................. 20-27
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xiii
Contents
20.3.6.2 Reassembly ..................................................................................................20-33
20.3.6.3 Attaching the Bottom Plate and Spring Assembly.........................................20-33
20.4 Testing and Troubleshooting .......................................................................................20-34
20.4.1 No Cursor ............................................................................................................20-35
20.4.1.1 Check Ventilator Configuration ....................................................................20-35
20.4.1.2 Check that DISPLAY Port Is Functioning .......................................................20-35
20.4.1.3 Check DCI Port Configurations ....................................................................20-35
20.4.1.4 Check Display Cable Connections ................................................................20-36
20.4.1.5 Check the Test Screens ................................................................................20-36
20.4.1.6 Check Display Power Supply Voltages ..........................................................20-38
20.4.1.7 Check PCB Assembly Cabling.......................................................................20-43
20.4.1.8 If the Display Still Doesn't Work ...................................................................20-43
20.4.2 Ventilator Does not Communicate with Display ...................................................20-44
20.4.3 Display Works but Printer Doesn't ........................................................................20-44
20.4.4 Display Shows All Data on One LIne.....................................................................20-46
20.4.5 Screen Display Otherwise Flawed .........................................................................20-48
20.4.7 Screen is Delaminating.........................................................................................20-49
20.4.8 Performance Testing ............................................................................................20-49
21 Storage
21.1 Preparation for Storage ..................................................................................................21-1
21.2 Storage ..........................................................................................................................21-2
21.2.1 Storage Requirements and Recommendations .......................................................21-2
21.2.2 Returning the Ventilator to Use after Storage .........................................................21-2
21.2.3 Ventilator Subassemblies ........................................................................................21-3
7200 Series Ventilatory System Assemblies and Accessories Parts List
A General Information
A.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1.1 General Configuration Identification ......................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 Special Configuration Identification .......................................................................... A-5
A.2 Ordering Information........................................................................................................ A-5
A.2.1 Service Requests ....................................................................................................... A-5
A.2.2 Warranty................................................................................................................... A-5
A.2.3 Return and Exchange Policy ...................................................................................... A-5
A.3 Using This Parts List ......................................................................................................... A-6
A.3.1 How To Find a Part Number ..................................................................................... A-6
A.3.2 How to Use the Parts Lists and Figures ...................................................................... A-6
A.4 Abbreviations ................................................................................................................... A-7
A.5 Reference Designators....................................................................................................... A-9
A.6 Service Kits ..................................................................................................................... A-10
A.6.1 7200 Series Upgrade Kits ........................................................................................ A-10
A.6.2 Enhanced-Plus Console Kit ...................................................................................... A-10
A.6.3 7200ae Ventilator Upgrade Kit for the 7250 Metabolic Monitor.............................. A-10
A.6.4 Modified Top Panel Kit............................................................................................ A-10
A.6.5 7250 Metabolic Monitor Accessory Startup Kit........................................................ A-11
A.6.6 Ventilator Appearance Kit ....................................................................................... A-11
xiv 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
Contents
A.6.7 Cabinet and Pedestal Kits ........................................................................................ A-11
A.6.8 7200a Display and DCI Interface Kit ........................................................................ A-11
A.6.9 7202 Display Compatibility Kit ................................................................................ A-11
A.6.10 7202 Display Upgrade Kit...................................................................................... A-12
A.6.11 Exhalation Compartment Upgrade Kit ................................................................... A-12
A.6.12 Rail Cover Appearance Kit ..................................................................................... A-12
A.6.13 Fan Door Kit .......................................................................................................... A-12
A.6.14 Pulsed Audio Alarm Kit .......................................................................................... A-12
A.6.15 Caster Upgrade Kit ................................................................................................ A-12
A.6.16 Stop Bracket Kit..................................................................................................... A-12
A.6.17 Pedestal Bumper Kit .............................................................................................. A-12
A.6.18 Flex Arm Reinforcement Kit ................................................................................... A-13
A.6.19 Ventilator Unit Preventive Maintenance Kits .......................................................... A-13
A.6.20 Compressor Compartment Preventive Maintenance Kits ....................................... A-15
A.6.21 Ventilator Unit Spare Part Kit ................................................................................. A-17
B 7200 Series Ventilatory System

B.1 7200 Series Ventilatory System Assemblies and Accessories ............................................... B-3
B.2 7250 Metabolic Monitor Assembly .................................................................................... B-8
B.3 Flex Arm Assemblies ........................................................................................................ B-10
B.4 Patient Pressure Water Trap Assembly.............................................................................. B-14
B.5 Wall Air Water Trap Assembly .......................................................................................... B-16
C Ventilator Subassemblies
C.1 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Ventilator ......................................................................C-2
C.2 220/240 V EMI Ventilator................................................................................................C-13
D Pneumatic Chassis Assembly

D.1 Pneumatic Chassis Assemblies (EMI/Non-EMI) ..................................................................D-3
D.2 Air Inlet Assembly .............................................................................................................D-6
D.3 Oxygen Inlet Assembly ...................................................................................................D-10
D.4 Oxygen and Air Flow Sensors..........................................................................................D-14
D.5 Upper Pneumatic Chassis ................................................................................................D-16
D.6 Safety Relief Valve/Back Pressure Kit ................................................................................D-18
D.7 Proportional Valve Group................................................................................................D-21
D.8 Lower Pneumatic Chassis ................................................................................................D-25
D.9 Pneumatic Chassis Tubing for External Exhalation Valves.................................................D-28
D.10 Pneumatic Chassis Fittings for External Exhalation Valves ..............................................D-30
D.11 Pneumatic Chassis Tubing for Internal Exhalation Valves ...............................................D-32
D.12 Pneumatic Chassis Fittings for Internal Exhalation Valves...............................................D-34
D.13 Exhalation Pilot Pressure Kit ..........................................................................................D-36
E Power Supply Assembly

E.1 100/115 V Power Supply Assembly.................................................................................... E-2
E.2 220/240 V Power Supply Assembly.................................................................................... E-7
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xv

Contents
F Utility Panel Assembly
F.1 100/115 V and Earlier (Non-EMI) 220/240 V Utility Panel Assembly ................................... F-3
F.2 220/240 V (EMI) Utility Panel Assembly.............................................................................. F-7
G Exhalation Compartment Assembly

G.1 Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assemblies...................................................... G-2
G.1.1 Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly
with Internal Exhalation Valve ........................................................................................ G-2
G.1.2 Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly
with External Exhalation Valve........................................................................................ G-8
G.2 Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assemblies ....................................................... G-12
G.2.1 Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly
with Internal Exhalation Valve ...................................................................................... G-12
G.2.2 Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly
with External Exhalation Valve...................................................................................... G-16
H Card Cage Assembly

H.1 Non-EMI Card Cage Assembly .......................................................................................... H-2
H.2 EMI Card Cage Assembly.................................................................................................. H-7
H.3 EMI Card Cage Connector Plate Assembly ...................................................................... H-10
I Console Assembly
I.1 Enhanced-Plus Console Assembly .........................................................................................I-2
I.2 Enhanced Console Assembly ................................................................................................I-7
I.3 Basic Console Assembly......................................................................................................I-11
J Connector Bracket Assemblies

J.1 7-Connector Bracket Assembly.............................................................................................J-2
J.2 4-Connector Bracket Assembly...........................................................................................J-14
K Ventilator Cabinet Assembly

K.1 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Ventilator Cabinet Assembly ..........................................K-3
K.2 Later 220/240 V (EMI) Ventilator Cabinet Assembly ...........................................................K-9
L Back Panel Assembly

L.1 7-Connector Back Panel Assembly ...................................................................................... L-3
L.4 Model 7200 Back Panel Assembly..................................................................................... L-10
M Compressor Pedestal Assembly

M.1 Compressor Pedestal Assembly ....................................................................................... M-3
M.2 Compressor Pedestal Base Assembly ............................................................................... M-9
M.3 Upper Compressor Compartment Assembly ................................................................. M-16
M.4 Compressor Pedestal Tubing......................................................................................... M-18
xvi 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
Contents
N Ventilator Pedestal Assembly
N.1 Ventilator Pedestal Assembly............................................................................................ N-2
N.2 Ventilator Pedestal Base Assembly.................................................................................... N-5
O Ventilator Cart Assembly

O.1 Ventilator Cart Assembly.................................................................................................. O-2
O.2 Ventilator Cart Drawer Assembly...................................................................................... O-4
P 7202 Display
P.1 7202 Display (Rear Switch) ................................................................................................ P-2
P.2 7202 Display (No External Switch)..................................................................................... P-3
P.3 PCB Assembly ................................................................................................................... P-6
P.4 Swivel Arm Assembly ......................................................................................................... P-8
Alphabetical and Numerical Parts Index

Alphabetical Parts Index ...................................................................................................Index-1
Numerical Parts Index ....................................................................................................Index-39
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xvii
Contents
This page is intentionally blank.
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xviii
FIGURES
Figure 1-1. 7200 Series Ventilatory System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

Figure 1-2. Enhanced-Plus Keyboard Controls and Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-3. Enhanced Keyboard Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Figure 1-4. Basic Keyboard Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Figure 1-5. Ventilator Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Figure 2-1. Pneumatic System Diagram (Internal Exhalation Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-2. Pneumatic system Diagram (External Exhalation Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Figure 2-3. Wall Gas Supply System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-4. Wall Gas Supply System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Figure 2-5. Motor Compressor System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-6. Motor Compressor System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Figure 2-7. Flow Control System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-8. Flow Control System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-9. Safety Valve System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Figure 2-10. Safety Valve System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-11. Patient System Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Figure 2-12. Patient System Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Figure 2-13. Patient System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Figure 2-14. Exhalation System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-15. Exhalation System Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Figure 2-16. PEEP/CPAP System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Figure 2-17. PEEP/CPAP System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Figure 2-18. ac Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-19. Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Figure 2-20. +5 V Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Figure 2-21. +10 V Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Figure 2-22. +12 V Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Figure 2-23. ±15 V Power Distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Figure 2-24. Battery Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Figure 2-25. 80188 CPU PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Figure 2-26. 8088 CPU PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Figure 2-27. Memory PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Figure 2-28. DCI-Display Controller PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Figure 2-29. Display Controller PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Figure 2-30. Front Panel Display PCB Block Diagram (Enhanced-Plus) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Figure 2-31. Front Panel Display PCB Block Diagram (Enhanced). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Figure 2-32. Front Panel Display PCB Block Diagram (Basic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Figure 2-33. Conversion PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Figure 2-34. Interface PCB Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Figure 2-35. Pulse Oximetry PCB Assembly Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-67
Figure 2-36. Absorption Factors in Pulse Oximetry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Figure 2-37. Mandatory Inspiration with 50% O2, Wall Air, and Nebulizer Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Figure 2-38. Spontaneous Inspiration with 70% O2, Wall Air, and Nebulizer Active. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xix
Figures
Figure 2-39. Gas Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
Figure 2-40. Flow of Mixed Gas from PSOL1 and PSOL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-77
Figure 2-41. Nebulizer Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-78
Figure 2-42. Exhalation with Compressor Active and Nebulizer Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-79
Figure 2-43. Exhalation System Operation (Internal Exhalation Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80
Figure 2-44. Exhalation System Operation (External Exhalation Valve) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-80
Figure 2-45. PEEP Operation during Exhalation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-81
Figure 2-46. Keyboard Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-83
Figure 2-47. 20-Character Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84
Figure 2-48. Numeric Display Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-84
Figure 2-49. LED Indicator Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-86
Figure 2-50. Alarm Summary Display Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-88
Figure 2-51. Audio Alarm Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-89
Figure 2-52. Analog Meter Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-90
Figure 2-53. Nurse Call Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-92
Figure 2-54. A/D Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-93
Figure 2-55. Proportional Solenoid Valve Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-95
Figure 2-56. Bus Timeout Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-96
Figure 2-57. Power Failure Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-99
Figure 2-58. Watchdog Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-101
Figure 2-59. Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-103
Figure 2-60. Back-up Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-105
Figure 2-61. Safety Valve Open Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-108
Figure 2-62. Wall Air-to-Compressor Switchover (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-109
Figure 2-62. Wall Air-to-Compressor Switchover (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-110
Figure 3-1. Configuration Message Definitions (Ventilators with DCI Option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Figure 3-2. Location of DIP Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
Figure 3-3. DIP Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5
Figure 3-4. Installing 7202 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6
Figure 3-5. Connecting 7202 Display Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7
Figure 3-6. Analog Output Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8
Figure 3-7. Installing Pulse Oximetry Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Figure 3-8. Installing Flex Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Figure 4-1. Elapsed Time Meter (ETM) Locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-2
Figure 4-2. Checking Resistance of Main Flow or Exhalation Bacteria Filter Using Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3
Figure 4-3. Checking Resistance of Bacteria Filter Using Metered Air Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4
Figure 4-4. Removing Electronics Compartment Cooling Fan Filter (Removable Louver Panel) . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Figure 4-5. Removing Electronics Compartment Cooling Fan (One-Piece Left-Hand Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6
Figure 4-6. Removing Compressor Compartment Cooling Fan Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Figure 5-2. LED Indicators on the 80188 CPU PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Figure 5-3. LED Indicators on the 8088 CPU PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Figure 5-4. Location of EST Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Figure 5-5. 7202 Display during Total EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Figure 5-6. 7202 Display during Quick EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Figure 5-8. Enhanced-Plus Keyboard Controls and Indicators Used in EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Figure 5-9. Enhanced Keyboard Controls and Indicators Used in EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-11
Figure 5-10. Basic Keyboard Controls and Indicators Used in EST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Figure 5-11. EST Status Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Figure 7-1. Connecting the PTS 2000 and Computer
xx 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

Figures
(if using BreathLab PTS software) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Figure 7-2. Attaching Tubing Between the 7200 Ventilator and PTS 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Figure 7-3. Enhanced-Plus Keyboard Lamp Test Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Figure 7-4. Enhanced Keyboard Lamp Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-5. Basic Keyboard Lamp Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Figure 7-6. Analog Output Connector Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Figure 7-7. Testing Power Supply Output Voltages
(non-EMI card cage shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Figure 7-8. Attaching Nebulizer Tubing to PTS 2000 (Tests 9 and 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Figure 7-9. Setup for Test 14, Step 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Figure 7-10. Setup for Test 14, Step 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30
Figure 9-1. Opening Left Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Figure 9-2. Removing Electronics Compartment Fan Filter (Removable Louver Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Figure 9-3. Removing Electronics Compartment Fan Filter (One-Piece Left Panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Figure 9-4. Removing Electronics Compartment Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Figure 9-5. Clipping Fan Alarm Wires (All 220/240 V Units Except German) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Figure 9-6. Removing Left and Corner Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Figure 9-7. Removing Pulse Oximetry Extension Cable and Retainers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Figure 9-8. Location of Rail Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Figure 9-9. Location of Serial Number Plate in Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Figure 9-10. Removing Ventilator Cabinet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Figure 10-1. Removing Pneumatic Chassis Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Figure 10-2. Removing Oxygen and Air Sensor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Figure 10-3. Water Trap/Filter Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Figure 10-4. Removing Water Trap/Filter Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
Figure 10-5. Disassembling Water Trap/Filter Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Figure 10-6. Q1/T1 Sensor Assembly and EPROM Matched Pair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Figure 10-7. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
Figure 10-8. Removing PS4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
Figure 10-9. Removing Pneumatic Chassis Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Figure 10-10. REG1/REG2 Adjustment Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
Figure 10-11. SOL1/SOL2 Exploded View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Figure 10-12. Adjusting REG4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
Figure 11-1. Power Supply Voltage and Trip Point Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Figure 11-2. Power Fail Trip Point Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4
Figure 11-3. Disconnecting Top-Mounted Surge Suppressor Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Figure 11-4. Disconnecting Harnesses from Utility Panel Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Figure 11-5. Removing Power Supply Assembly and Top-Mounted External Surge Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Figure 11-6. Removing Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10
Figure 11-7. Isolation Transformer Terminal Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11
Figure 12-1. Utility Panel Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Figure 12-2. Disconnecting Top-Mounted Surge Suppressor Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
Figure 12-3. Removing Utility Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-4
Figure 12-4. Removing Utility Panel Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6
Figure 12-5. Removing Utility Panel Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Figure 12-6. Removing Line Voltage Filter from 220/240 V Utility Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
Figure 13-1. Removing Exhalation Bacteria Filter and
Heater from Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
Figure 13-2. Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Components (Internal Exhalation Valve) . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xxi
Figures
Figure 13-3. Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Components (External Exhalation Valve) . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Figure 13-4. Removing Q3/T3, Check Valve Assembly, and
Exhalation Valve from Bottom-Loading Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6
Figure 13-5. Detaching Audio Alarm Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-7
Figure 13-6. Removing Exhalation Valve from Front-Loading Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-10
Figure 13-7. Removing Bacteria Filter Heater from Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Figure 13-8. Removing Audio Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-13
Figure 13-9. Removing Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-15
Figure 13-10. Removing Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-17
Figure 13-11. Location of Serial Number Plate (Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-18
Figure 14-1. Motherboard PCB Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Figure 14-2. EMI Filter Connector Plate Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3
Figure 14-3. Card Cage Assembly, 80188-Based Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Figure 14-4. Card Cage Assembly, 8088-Based Units with Pulse Oximetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-6
Figure 14-5. Card Cage Assembly, 8088-Based Units without Pulse Oximetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-7
Figure 14-6. Jumper Connector Positions on Pulse Oximetry PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-10
Figure 14-7. 80188 CPU PCB: EPROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12
Figure 14-8. 8088 CPU PCB: EPROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-12
Figure 14-9. DCI-Display Controller PCB: Option PAL and Flow Sensor EPROM Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
Figure 14-10. Memory PCB: EPROM and PAL Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-13
Figure 14-11. EPROM/PAL Removal Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-14
Figure 14-12. Close-up of EPROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-15
Figure 14-13. Inserting EPROM/PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-16
Figure 14-14. Locations of R84, R85, and R86 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-18
Figure 14-15. R84 Calibration Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-19
Figure 14-16. Disconnecting Cables from EMI Card Cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-22
Figure 14-17. Removing Card Cage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-23
Figure 15-1. Installing Status Lamps in Ventilator with Basic Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-2
Figure 15-2. Raising Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-3
Figure 15-3. Console Components with Console in Raised Position (Enhanced Console Shown) . . . . . . . . .15-4
Figure 15-4. Console Components with Console in Raised Position (Enhanced-Plus Console Shown) . . . . . .15-5
Figure 15-5. Removing REG5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-6
Figure 15-6. Removing Analog Meter from Enhanced Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-7
Figure 15-7. Removing Analog Meter from Basic Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-8
Figure 15-8. Adjusting Analog Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-10
Figure 15-9. Cutting Alarm Retaining Straps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-11
Figure 15-10. Removing Front Panel Assembly from Enhanced-Plus Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-12
Figure 15-11. Removing Shield from Front Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-13
Figure 15-12. Aligning Edge of CR39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-14
Figure 15-13. Aligning Scale Marks with LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-15
Figure 15-14. Installing Option Tabs and Gasket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-16
Figure 15-15. Removing Front Panel Display PCB and Keyboard from Enhanced Console Assembly . . . . . . .15-17
Figure 15-16. Removing Front Panel Display PCB and Keyboard from Basic Console Assembly. . . . . . . . . . .15-20
Figure 15-17. Pulsed Alarm PCB on Enhanced-Plus Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-22
Figure 15-18. Pulsed Alarm PCB on Basic or Enhanced Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-23
Figure 15-19. Main Flow Bacteria Filter Compartment Door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15-24
Figure 16-1. Removing Compressor Compartment Cover Access Panels and Air Compressor Filter. . . . . . . .16-2
Figure 16-2. Compressor Compartment Viewed from Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-3
Figure 16-3. Compressor Compartment ac Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16-4
xxii 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
Figures
Figure 16-4. REG3 Adjustment Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-7
Figure 16-5. PS3/REG3 Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-10
Figure 16-6. Removing Compressor and Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-12
Figure 16-7. Compressor Terminal Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Figure 16-8. Orienting Base Fan Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-14
Figure 16-9. Compressor Pedestal Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-16
Figure 17-1. Removing Ventilator Pedestal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2
Figure 17-2. Removing Pedestal Bumpers and Casters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4
Figure 18-1. Removing Ventilator Cart and Serviceable Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3
Figure 18-2. Removing Drawer from Ventilator Cart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5
Figure 19-1. Removing and Repairing Top Cabinet Panel and Top Cover (Unmodified Version). . . . . . . . . . 19-2
Figure 19-2. Removing and Repairing Top Cabinet Panel and Top Cover (7250 Monitor Mount Version) . . 19-3
Figure 19-3. Removing Back Panel and Inner Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-5
Figure 19-4. Removing Connector Bracket (Seven-Slot Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-7
Figure 19-5. Removing Cable and Harness Assemblies from Non-EMI 7-Connector Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-8
Figure 19-6. Removing Cables and Harness Assemblies from EMI 7-Connector Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-9
Figure 19-7. Removing Cables from 2-Connector Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-10
Figure 20-1. 7202 Display (Rear Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-2
Figure 20-2. 7202 Display (No External Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-3
Figure 20-3. 7202 Display (Rear Switch)/7200 Series Ventilator Interconnection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-5
Figure 20-4. 7202 Display (No External Switch)/7200 Series Ventilator Interconnections Diagram. . . . . . . . 20-6
Figure 20-5. Patient Data Monitoring Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-8
Figure 20-6. Ventilator Settings 1 Screen (Volume Ventilation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Figure 20-7. Ventilator Settings 1 Screen (Pressure Control Ventilation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-9
Figure 20-8. Ventilator Settings 2 Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Figure 20-9. Alarm screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-10
Figure 20-10. <++> Key Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
Figure 20-11. Quick EST Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-12
Figure 20-12. Total EST Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-13
Figure 20-13. Printer Switch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-16
Figure 20-14. Removing/Replacing the Rear Housing (Displays with Rear Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-17
Figure 20-15. Removing/Replacing the Internal Harness from the
Rear Housing (Displays with Rear Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-18
Figure 20-16. Removing/Replacing the Rear Housing (no External Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-19
Figure 20-17. PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-21
Figure 20-18. Piggyback PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-22
Figure 20-19. Power Supply PCB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-23
Figure 20-20. Controller PCB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-24
Figure 20-21. Electroluminescent PCB with Ribbon Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-25
Figure 20-22. Swivel Arm Assembly (Displays with Rear Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-28
Figure 20-23. Swivel Arm Assembly (Displays with No External Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-29
Figure 20-24. Handle and Swivel Arm Assembly (Displays with No External Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-30
Figure 20-25. Bottom Plate, Spring assembly, And Swivel Arm Assembly
(Displays with Rear Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-31
Figure 20-26. Bottom Plate, Spring Assembly, and Swivel Arm Assembly
(Displays with No External Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-32
Figure 20-27. Swivel Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-33
Figure 20-28. Setting the Display Switch (Displays with Rear Switch Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-37
Figure 20-29. Moving the 7202 Controller PCB Jumper from E3 to E7 (Displays with no External Switch) . . 20-38
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xxiii
Figures
Figure 20-30. 7202 Display Voltage Test Points (Early Version of Power Supply PCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-39
Figure 20-31. 7202 Display Voltage Test Points (Current Version of Power Supply PCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-41
Figure 20-32. Fusible Link and Transistor Screws (Early Version of Power Supply PCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-42
Figure 20-33. Testing Across the Capacitor (Early Version of Power Supply PCB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-43
Figure 20-34. Printer Self-Test Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-45
Figure 20-35. Screen Template EPROM (U17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20-47
Figure A-1. Part Numbering Marking and Upgrade Labels (samples shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Figure A-2. E/C Record Label (sample shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Figure A-3. Rail Tags and Option Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Figure A-4. Sample Shipping Document. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Figure B-1. 7200 Series Ventilatory System (Sheet 1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
Figure B-1. 7200 Series Ventilatory System (Sheet 2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-2
Figure 2-2. 7200 Series Ventilatory System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-7
Figure 2-3. 7250 Metabolic Monitor Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-9
Figure B-4. Earlier Flex Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-11
Figure B-5. Later Flex Arm Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-13
Figure B-6. Patient Pressure Water Trap Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-15
Figure B-7. Wall Air Water Trap Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-17
Figure C-1. Ventilator Assemblies, Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Figure C-2. 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Ventilator (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-9
Figure C-2. 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Ventilator (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-11
Figure 3-3. 220/240 V EMI Ventilator (Sheet 1 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-20
Figure C-3. 220/240 V EMI Ventilator (Sheet 2 of 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-23
Figure D-1. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly (EMI and non-EMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Figure D-2. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly (EMI/Non-EMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Figure D-3. Air Inlet Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Figure D-4. Oxygen Inlet Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-13
Figure D-5. Oxygen or Air Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-15
Figure D-6. Upper Pneumatic Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-17
Figure D-7. Safety Relief Valve/Back Pressure Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-19
Figure D-8. Proportional Valve Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-23
Figure 4-9. Lower Pneumatic Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-27
Figure 0-10. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Tubing Diagram for External Exhalation Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-29
Figure 0-11. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Fitting Diagram for External Exhalation Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-31
Figure 0-12. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Tubing Diagram for Internal Exhalation Valves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-33
Figure 0-13. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Fitting Diagram for Internal Exhalation Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-35
Figure D-14. Exhalation Pilot Pressure Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-37
Figure E-1. Power Supply Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Figure 5-2. 100/115 V Power Supply Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-6
Figure 5-3. 220/240 V Power Supply Assembly (Sheet 1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-13
Figure E-3. 220/240 V Power Supply Assembly (Sheet 2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-14
Figure F-1. Utility Panel Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Figure F-2. 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Utility Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-5
Figure F-3. 220/240 V (EMI) Utility Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-9
Figure G-1. Exhalation Compartment Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
Figure G-2. Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with Internal Exhalation Valve . . . . . . . . . G-7
Figure G-3. Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with External Exhalation Valve. . . . . . . . G-11
Figure G-4. Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with Internal Exhalation Valve. . . . . . . . . . G-15
Figure G-5. Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with External Exhalation Valve . . . . . . . . . G-19
xxiv 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
Figures
Figure H-1. Card Cage Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-1
Figure 8-2. Non-EMI Card Cage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-5
Figure 8-3. EMI Card Cage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-9
Figure H-4. EMI Card Cage Connector Plate Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .H-11
Figure I-1. Console Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Figure 9-2. Enhanced-Plus Console Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-5
Figure 9-3. Enhanced Console Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-9
Figure 9-4. Basic Console Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-15
Figure J-1. Connector Bracket Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-1
Figure J-2. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 80188-Based Units, with Pulse Oximetry) . . . . . . . . . J-3
Figure J-3. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 80188-Based Units, without Pulse Oximetry) . . . . . . J-6
Figure J-4. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (EMI, 80188-Based Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-8
Figure J-5. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 80188-Based Units, with Earlier Harness) . . . . . . . . J-10
Figure 10-6. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (8088-Based Units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-13
Figure J-7. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 7200spe/7200e, with Earlier Harness) . . . . . . . . . . . J-15
Figure J-8. 4-Connector Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-18
Figure 10-9. 3-Connector Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-21
Figure J-10. 2-Connector Bracket Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-23
Figure K-1. Ventilator Cabinet Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-1
Figure 11-2. 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Ventilator Cabinet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-7
Figure K-3. Later 220/240 V (EMI) Ventilator Cabinet Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-15
Figure L-1. Back Panel Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
Figure L-2. 7-Connector Back Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-5
Figure L-5. Model 7200 Back Panel Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-11
Figure M-1. Compressor Pedestal Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
Figure 13-2. Compressor Pedestal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-7
Figure 13-3. Compressor Pedestal Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-11
Figure M-4. Lower Compressor Compartment Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-15
Figure M-5. Upper Compressor Compartment Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-17
Figure M-6. Compressor Pedestal Tubing Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-19
Figure N-1. Ventilator Pedestal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
Figure N-2. Ventilator Pedestal Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
Figure N-3. Ventilator Pedestal Base Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-7
Figure O-1. Ventilator Cart Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
Figure O-2. Ventilator Cart Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-3
Figure O-3. Ventilator Cart Drawer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-5
Figure P-1. 7202 Display (Rear Switch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
Figure P-2. 7202 Display (No External Switch). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-3
Figure P-3. PCB Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-5
Figure P-4. Swivel Arm Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-7
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xxv
Figures
xxvi 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
TABLES
Table 1-1. Ventilator Model Characteristics .................................................................................................. 1-4

Table 1-2. Specifications for Compatible Printer ........................................................................................... 1-6
Table 1-3. Special Hardware Requirements for Options ................................................................................ 1-8
Table 1-4. Physical Characteristics ................................................................................................................ 1-9
Table 1-5. Environmental Requirements ....................................................................................................... 1-9
Table 1-6. Electrical Power Specifications ................................................................................................... 1-10
Table 1-7. Pneumatic Specifications ........................................................................................................... 1-11
Table 1-8. Performance Characteristics ...................................................................................................... 1-12
Table 1-9. Recommended Tools, Test Equipment, and Service Materials .................................................... 1-14
Table 1-10. Specifications for Equivalent Test Equipment ............................................................................. 1-16
Table 1-11. Service Kits ................................................................................................................................ 1-17
Table 1-12. Controls and Indicators ............................................................................................................. 1-19
Table 2-1. Pneumatic Components Data ...................................................................................................... 2-2
Table 2-2. Electrical Units and Their Functions ........................................................................................... 2-30
Table 2-1. Back-up Ventilation Causes and Indications ............................................................................. 2-100
Table 2-2. Safety Valve Open Causes and Indications ............................................................................... 2-103
Table 3-1. Checking DIP Switch Settings (DCI 2.0 Installed) ......................................................................... 3-2
Table 3-2. Checking DIP Switch Settings (DCI 1.0 Installed) ......................................................................... 3-2
Table 4-1. Schedule of Periodic Maintenance ............................................................................................... 4-1
Table 4-2. Preventive Maintenance Kits ........................................................................................................ 4-7
Table 4-3. Cleaning and Sterilizing of Ventilator Parts and Surfaces .............................................................. 4-8
Table 5-1. Self-tests ..................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Table 5-2. Displays Used in EST Operation ................................................................................................. 5-10
Table 5-1. 80188-Based Ventilator Memory Map ....................................................................................... 5-18
Table 5-2. 8088-Based Ventilator Memory Map ......................................................................................... 5-18
Table 6-1. POST Error Codes (80188-Based Units) ....................................................................................... 6-3
Table 6-2. POST Error Codes (8088-Based Units) ......................................................................................... 6-7
Table 6-3. Soft Error (All Units) ................................................................................................................... 6-10
Table 6-4. EST Errors (All Units) .................................................................................................................. 6-13
Table 6-5. Communications Errors (All Units) ............................................................................................. 6-37
Table 6-6. Faults (All Units) ........................................................................................................................ 6-38
Table 7-1. Recommended Performance Verification Intervals ....................................................................... 7-2
Table 7-2. Test Equipment Required for Performance Verification ................................................................ 7-2
Table 7-3. Puritan Bennett Service Materials Required for Performance Verification ...................................... 7-3
Table 7-4. Acceptable Current Draw Values ................................................................................................. 7-7
Table 8-1. Paint/Lacquer Colors ................................................................................................................... 8-4
Table 8-2. Electrostatic Shielding Bags ......................................................................................................... 8-5
Table 14-1. Jumper Connector Installation ................................................................................................... 14-9
Table 14-2. Recommended Configuration of PCBs in Card Cage ............................................................... 14-10
Table 20-1. Display Screen Specifications ..................................................................................................... 20-7
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xxvii
Tables
Table 20-2. Test Voltages ...........................................................................................................................20-40
Table 21-1. Electrostatic Shielding Bags ........................................................................................................21-3
Table A-1. List of Abbreviations .................................................................................................................... A-7
Table A-2. Electrical and Pneumatic Component Reference Designators ...................................................... A-9
Table A-3. Ventilator Appearance Kit Parts ................................................................................................. A-11
Table A-4. 2,500-Hour Ventilator Unit Preventive Maintenance Kit Parts List
(Basic Keyboard) ......................................................................................................................... A-13
Table A-5. 2,500-Hour Ventilator Unit Preventive Maintenance Kit Parts List
(Enhanced/Enhanced-Plus Keyboard) .......................................................................................... A-14
Table A-6. 10,000-Hour Ventilator Preventive Maintenance Kit Parts List ................................................... A-14
Table A-7. 2,500-Hour Compressor Compartment Preventive Maintenance Kit Parts List ........................... A-16
Table A-8. 10,000-Hour Compressor Compartment Preventive Maintenance Kit Parts List ......................... A-16
Table A-9. Spare Parts Kit Parts List ............................................................................................................ A-17
Table B-1. 7200 Series Ventilatory System Assemblies and Accessories Parts List ...........................................B-3
Table B-2. 7250 Metabolic Monitor Assembly Parts List ................................................................................B-8
Table B-3. Earlier Flex Arm Assembly Parts List ............................................................................................B-10
Table B-4. Later Flex Arm Assembly Parts List ..............................................................................................B-12
Table B-5. Patient Pressure Water Trap Assembly Parts List ..........................................................................B-14
Table B-6. Wall Air Water Trap Assembly Parts List ......................................................................................B-16
Table C-1. 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Ventilator Assembly Parts List .................................................. C-2
Table C-2. 220/240 V EMI Ventilator Assembly Parts List ............................................................................ C-13
Table D-1. Pneumatic Chassis Assemblies (EMI/Non-EMI) Parts List .............................................................. D-3
Table D-2. Air Inlet Assembly Parts List ......................................................................................................... D-6
Table D-3. Oxygen Inlet Assembly Parts List ............................................................................................... D-10
Table D-4. Oxygen and Air Flow Sensors Parts List ..................................................................................... D-14
Table D-5. Upper Pneumatic Chassis Parts List ........................................................................................... D-16
Table D-6. Safety Relief Valve/Back Pressure Kit Parts List ............................................................................ D-18
Table D-7. Proportional Valve Group Parts List ........................................................................................... D-21
Table D-8. Lower Pneumatic Chassis Parts List ............................................................................................ D-25
Table D-9. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Tubing Parts List for Units with External Exhalation Valves ............ D-28
Table D-10. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Fitting Parts List for Units with External Exhalation Valves ............. D-30
Table D-11. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Tubing Parts List for Units with Internal Exhalation Valves ............. D-32
Table D-12. Pneumatic Chassis Assembly Fitting Parts List for Units with Internal Exhalation Valves .............. D-34
Table D-13. Exhalation Pilot Pressure Kit Parts List ........................................................................................ D-36
Table E-1. 100/115 V Power Supply Assembly Parts List ............................................................................... E-2
Table E-2. 220/240 V Power Supply Assembly Parts List ............................................................................... E-7
Table F-1. 100/115 V and Earlier (Non-EMI) 220/240 V Utility Panel Assembly Parts List .............................. F-3
Table F-2. 220/240 V (EMI) Utility Panel Assembly Parts List ......................................................................... F-7
Table G-1. Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with Internal Exhalation Valve Parts List ..... G-2
Table G-2. Bottom-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with External Exhalation Valve Parts List ..... G-8
Table G-3. Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with Internal Exhalation Valve Parts List ....... G-12
Table G-4. Front-Loading Exhalation Compartment Assembly with External Exhalation Valve Parts List ...... G-16
Table H-1. Non-EMI Card Cage Assembly Parts List ...................................................................................... H-2
Table H-2. Recommended Configurations .................................................................................................... H-5
Table H-3. EMI Card Cage Assembly Parts List .............................................................................................. H-7
Table H-4. EMI Card Cage Connector Plate Assembly Parts List .................................................................. H-10
Table I-1. Enhanced-Plus Console Assembly Parts List ...................................................................................I-2
Table I-2. Enhanced Console Assembly Parts List ..........................................................................................I-7
Table I-3. Basic Console Assembly Parts List ................................................................................................I-11
xxviii 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
Tables
Table J-1. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 80188-Based Units,
with Pulse Oximetry) Parts List ........................................................................................................ J-2
Table J-2. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 80188-Based Units,
without Pulse Oximetry) Parts List ................................................................................................... J-4
Table J-3. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (EMI, 80188-Based Units) Parts List .............................................. J-6
Table J-4. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 80188-Based Units, with Earlier Harness) Parts List ...... J-8
Table J-5. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 8088-Based Units) Parts List ...................................... J-10
Table J-6. 7-Connector Bracket Assembly (Non-EMI, 7200spe/7200e, with Earlier Harness) Parts List ......... J-12
Table J-7. 4-Connector Bracket Assembly Parts List ..................................................................................... J-14
Table K-1. 100/115 V and Earlier 220/240 V Ventilator Cabinet Assembly Parts List ..................................... K-3
Table K-2. Later 220/240 V (EMI) Ventilator Cabinet Assembly Parts List ...................................................... K-9
Table L-1. 7-Connector Back Panel Assembly Parts List ................................................................................ L-3
Table L-4. Model 7200 Back Panel Assembly Parts List ............................................................................... L-10
Table M-1. Compressor Pedestal Assembly Parts List .................................................................................... M-3
Table M-2. Compressor Pedestal Base Assembly Parts List ............................................................................ M-9
Table M-3. Lower Compressor Compartment Assembly Parts List ............................................................... M-13
Table M-4. Upper Compressor Compartment Assembly Parts List .............................................................. M-16
Table M-5. Compressor Pedestal Tubing .................................................................................................... M-18
Table N-1. Ventilator Pedestal Assembly Parts List ........................................................................................ N-2
Table N-2. Ventilator Pedestal Base Assembly Parts List ................................................................................ N-5
Table O-1. Ventilator Cart Assembly Parts List .............................................................................................. O-2
Table O-2. Ventilator Cart Drawer Assembly Parts List .................................................................................. O-4
Table P-1. 7202 Display Parts List (Rear Switch) ........................................................................................... P-2
Table P-2. 7202 Display (No External Switch) .............................................................................................. P-3
Table P-3. PCB Assembly Parts List ............................................................................................................... P-6
Table P-4. Swivel Arm Assembly Parts List .................................................................................................... P-8
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xxix
Tables
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xxx
SECTION
SECTION
General Information 1 1
This section provides introductory information for the Puritan-Bennett 7200 Series
Ventilatory System. Included is information on ventilator configurations, performance
specifications and characteristics, software options and a list of recommended tools and test
equipment.
1.1 Safety
Warning
• To prevent personal injury or death, do not attempt any ventilator service, repair, or parts
replacement while a patient or other person is connected to the ventilator, or when the
ventilator is connected to ac power.
• To prevent disease transmission, use personal protective equipment when handling
contaminated bacterial filters or other patient accessories. Use Cavicide or equivalent to
kill bloodborne pathogens, as required.
• Ventilator maintenance may involve exposure to hazardous materials, equipment and
conditions such as: possible electrical shock; pressurized gas; transmittable diseases; and
fire, which could result from an oxygen-enriched environment and easily ignitable
material. Before servicing the 7200 Series Ventilatory System, be aware of possible hazards
and take necessary precautions.
• Familiarize yourself with and adhere to all safety warnings and cautions on the
ventilator labels and in related publications, including this manual. Also familiarize
yourself with any warnings and cautions associated with the service equipment and
materials being used, as well as those posted in the facility where the ventilator is serviced.
Failure to adhere to such warnings and cautions at all times may result in injury or
property damage.
• Use any applicable personal protective equipment and adhere to its applicable
warnings and cautions.
• Be aware of any safety standards and considerations specific to your situation. Safety
standards may vary with international, federal, state, and local regulatory agencies. When
in doubt, consult material safety data sheets; environmental, health, and safety
professionals; and regulatory affairs specialists. In addition, many facilities and
institutions may have their own safety procedures. Be sure to follow these in addition to
the precautions here.
• After servicing the ventilator, ensure it passes the performance verification test
(Section 7) before it is returned to operation. Performance verification ensures the safe
operation of the ventilator and its functional integrity.
066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 1-1
1.2 General Product Description

The 7200 Series Ventilator and its various options and accessories comprise the 7200 Series
Ventilatory System, shown in Figure 1-1. The system’s capabilities range from controlled
mandatory breathing to fully spontaneous breathing. It operates in CMV, SIMV, and CPAP
modes.
The 7200 ventilator delivers breaths according to parameters and other data input by the
operator via a membrane keyboard. The ventilator communicates with the operator by
displaying parameters, system-generated messages, alarms, and other indications on the
ventilator front panel. An audio alarm also alerts the operator to emergency situations.
The 7200 ventilator has provisions for a metabolic monitor which, when installed, assists the
physician in determining vital respiratory and metabolic needs of a patient.
The ventilator is an electrically powered tabletop unit that operates on pressurized air and
oxygen sources. A pedestal or cart assembly is available to support the ventilator. An optional
compressor assembly installed in the pedestal provides compressed air if wall air is not
available.
1.3 Configuration Information

The 7200 Series Ventilatory System is currently available in a variety of versions, intended to
meet differing needs and regulations throughout the world. In addition, various software and
hardware changes have been made to the ventilator since its introduction.
1.3.1 Configuration Differences

The major differences in configuration among ventilators are listed below.
• Language. Keyboard, labels, software, displays, and operator’s manual are available in a
variety of languages.
• Electrical requirements. Available in 100 V/50 Hz, 100 V/60 Hz, 115 V/60 Hz, 220 V/50
Hz, 220 V/60 Hz, 240 V/50 Hz.
• Compressor. With or without compressor compartment.
• Cart or pedestal assembly. With pedestal assembly (with or without compressor inside),
cart assembly, or stand-alone.
• Exhalation compartment. With internal exhalation valve, bottom-loading exhalation
compartment.
• Keyboards. Multicolor Enhanced-Plus keyboard, which includes individual option keys
and bar graph-type airway pressure display.
• Alarm tone. Continuous or pulsed (intermittent) tone.
• PCB set. Different ventilators may have between four and six PCBs in their card cage slots.
All ventilators have conversion and interface PCBs. In 80188 microprocessor-based
ventilators, however, two PCBs (80188 CPU PCB or megaCPU PCB, and DCI-display
controller PCB) replace three PCBs in 8088 microprocessor-based ventilators (8088 CPU
PCB, memory PCB, and display controller PCB). An optional pulse oximetry PCB may
reside in the card cage. Ventilators with 8088 microprocessors are no longer
manufactured.
• Options and accessories. Ventilators may have the options and accessories listed in
Sections 1.3.4 and 1.3.5.
1-2 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)
General Information 1
2-00217
Figure 1-1. 7200 Series Ventilatory System
1.3.2 Model Differences

Reflecting these major configuration differences, the 7200 Series includes several currently-
available models: the 7200ae, 7200spe, and 7200e. Table 1-1 lists the characteristics of these
models.
Table 1-1: Ventilator Model Characteristics
Exhalation Exhalation
Model CPU Keyboard Notes
compartment valve
7200ae 80188 Enhanced-Plus Bottom- Internal Console says “7200 series

enhanced, or loading ventilatory system.” May
basic have a rail tag saying
“7200ae.”
7200spe 80188 Enhanced-Plus Bottom- Internal Console says “7200 series

“7200spe.”
7200e 80188 Enhanced-Plus Bottom- External Console says “7200 series

“7200e.”
1.3.3 Viewing Ventilator Software Information
NOTE:
Only the electrical system needs to be operational to view the ventilator software
information on the ventilator display.
To view the ventilator model, keyboard type, software part number, revision level and option
code, press the ventilator <LAMP TEST> key during normal ventilation. If the ventilator’s
software information is not displayed, enter into EST and at either the [QUICK EST] or
[TOTAL EST] prompt, press the <I:E RATIO> key.
In 80188-based ventilators, software information is displayed as follows:
a b c nnnnn-85-r xyz
Option code
Software revision level
Software part number
MegaCPU PCB installed? (May not be

installed in earlier software versions)
M = yes
Blank = no
(keyboard type)
B = basic
E = enhanced
P = Enhanced-Plus
(ventilator model)
T = 7200ae
S = 7200spe
E = 7200e
In 8088-based ventilators (which are no longer manufactured), software information is

displayed as follows:
aaa nnnnn-85-r xyz
Option code
Software revision level
Software part number
(ventilator model/keyboard type)

REV = 7200a
SP = 7200sp
SPI = 7200spi
1.3.4 Accessories
The following accessories can be used with the ventilator.
• Patient system, either conventional or simplified. The use of a Puritan Bennett patient
tubing circuit is recommended.
• Humidifier. The ventilator includes an electrical ac socket and a mounting plate to
accommodate a humidifier.
• 7202 Display. Supplements the visual information provided on the ventilator’s keyboard
display panel by providing enhanced viewing of ventilator messages, detailed readouts of
ventilator settings and status, and visibility of ventilator conditions from a wide variety of
angles and distances. See Section 20 for information on servicing this accessory.
• 7250 Metabolic Monitor. Measures O2 consumption and CO2 production of patients on

the 7200ae Ventilator. Uses these measurements and other calculations to help determine
the patient’s ventilatory, metabolic, and nutritional requirements. See the 7250 Metabolic
Monitor Service and Operator’s Manual (P/N 4-022396-00) for information on servicing this
accessory.
• Oxygen Monitor. It is recommended that an Oxygen monitor be used with the ventilator
to provide a backup means of monitoring oxygen concentrations. The MiniOx 3000
(P/N 4-023698-00) is available and can be mounted to the ventilator with the MiniOx
3000 Vent Mount bracket (P/N 4-023413-00).
• Analog recorder/remote nurse call unit. An analog output connector on the utility
panel permits connection to a remote nurse call unit. (Puritan Bennett does not supply
analog recorders, remote nurse call units, or the cables to connect them.)
• Printer. The Digital Communications Interface option (Option 20) provides a method for
sending pre-formatted reports to a printer. Table 1-2 lists the specifications for a
compatible printer.
Table 1-2: Specifications for Compatible Printer
Description Requirements
Print method Inkjet or impact dot matrix
Printing pitch 80 characters per line (normal),

132 characters per line (compressed)
Line spacing 6 lines per inch
Paper size 8.5 x 11 inches
Paper feed Continuous (pin) feed or friction feed
Graphics Epson FX-85 compatible
Communications interface:
Communications EIA-232C, serial, 9600 bps
Parity/data size None/8 bit
Transmission Full duplex
Protocol XON/XOFF
Connector 25-pin, male, sub-D type
Cable Shielded, jacketed, null-modem
(P/N 4-018061-00 or equivalent)
1.3.5 Options
Because the 7200 Series Ventilator is microprocessor-controlled, software and hardware
options can be added. Consult your Puritan Bennett sales representative for information on
ordering any of the following options. Table 1-3 lists the ventilator hardware required to run
these options.
• Option 10: Pressure Support. Permits the operator to select a positive pressure that
is active during the inspiratory phase of any spontaneous breath. In some cases, Pressure
Support may reduce the patient’s inspiratory work of breathing by negating the resistance
at the endotracheal tube.
• Option 20: Digital Communications Interface (DCI).The earlier version (DCI 1.0)
equips the ventilator to transmit pre-formatted reports to a printer. The later version (DCI
2.0) allows you to configure one of the ventilator’s ports either for a printer or for a second
interactive device (other than the 7250 Metabolic Monitor). The ability to communicate
with one interactive device plus the 7250 Monitor is a standard feature on the ventilator.
• Option 30/40: Respiratory Mechanics/Monitoring. Allows the ventilator to perform
respiratory maneuvers and monitoring with no special setup. The maneuvers measure,
calculate, and display parameters that describe the mechanical status of a patient’s lung
and respiratory muscles.
• The Static Mechanics maneuver calculates static compliance and airway resistance of a
patient’s lungs. The Negative Inspiratory Pressure maneuver measures the maximum
sub-PEEP inspiratory pressure a patient can generate against an occluded airway over a
three-second period. The Vital Capacity maneuver measures the maximum volume a
patient can exhale following a maximal inspiratory effort (not a forced vital capacity).
• The Dynamic Mechanics monitoring function calculates compliance and airway resistance
as a breath is delivered. The Peak Spontaneous Flow monitoring function measures,
calculates, and displays the maximum inspiratory flow for spontaneous breaths. During
all maneuvers, the patient-ventilator connection remains undisturbed.
• Option 50: Flow-by. Minimizes the delay between the patient’s inspiratory effort and the
supply of gas to the patient wye. Supplies a predetermined flow of gas to the patient
tubing circuit before inspiration, making fresh gas available to the patient as soon as
inspiratory effort begins. Requires an internal exhalation valve and in-circuit water traps.
The later version (Flow-by 2.0) provides the added advantage that all patient-initiated
breaths, including pressure-supported breaths and apnea ventilation, can be flow-
triggered.
• Option 60: Graphics. Enhances the monitoring capabilities of the 7200ae by showing
patient data and waveform curves on the 7202 Display. Six types of waveform curve show
patient activity: Pressure vs. Time, Flow vs. Time, Volume vs. Time, Plethysmograph vs.
Time, Pressure vs. Volume, and Flow vs. Volume. The later version (Graphics 2.0) adds a
trending capability, allowing up to 12 (from a menu of over 30) parameters to be trended
for up to 72 hours; these include metabolic monitoring parameters. Graphics 2.0 also
includes these indices: rapid shallow breathing index (RR/VT), fraction of inspiratory
time/total cycle time (Ti /Ttot), and mean inspiratory flow (VT/Ti).
• Option 80: Pressure Control Ventilation. Permits the 7200ae to deliver constant-
pressure mandatory breaths in CMV, SIMV, and CPAP modes. Unlike volume ventilation,
which is designed to deliver mandatory breaths at a preset volume and peak flow, pressure
ventilation delivers mandatory breaths, at a preset inspiratory pressure and time or I:E
ratio. Volume and flow may vary on a breath-to-breath basis, depending on changes in
patient compliance and resistance.
• Option 90: Pulse Oximetry. A combined hardware accessory and software option that
noninvasively determines a patient’s functional arterial oxygen saturation (SpO2) and
pulse rate by sensing the absorption of two wavelengths of light passed through living
tissue. The hardware that supports this option includes the pulse oximetry PCB, which is
integral to the ventilator, and associated cabling and sensors.
Table 1-3: Special Hardware Requirements for Options
Option Requirements
Pressure Support None.

(Option 10)
DCI (Option 20) DIP switch settings on memory or DCI-display controller PCB set as indicated in
Figure 3-3. Internal cabling. Three- or seven-connector bracket on back panel.
DCI 2.0 requires a 7200ae or 7200spe configuration.
Respiratory Mechanics/ None.

Monitoring
(Option 30/40)
Flow-by (Option 50) Internal exhalation valve, patient tubing circuit with water traps Flow-by 2.0
requires a 7200ae configuration.
Graphics (Option 60) 7200ae configuration with 7202 Display. Graphics 2.0 requires a 7200ae
Ventilator with megaCPU PCB and 7202 Display.
Pressure Control 7200ae configuration.

Ventilation (Option 80)
Pulse Oximetry Pulse oximetry PCB. Seven-connector bracket on back panel and internal and
(Option 90) external cabling.
7202 Display DIP switch settings on memory or DCI-display controller PCB set as indicated in
Figure 3-3. Internal cabling. Three- or seven-connector bracket on back panel.
7250 Metabolic 7200ae configuration with internal exhalation valve, a modified ventilator top
Monitor panel, exhalation flow sensor (Q3/T3) with matched EPROM (sensor assembly
P/N 4-018256-00), DIP switches set as indicated in Figure 3-3, a humidifier
reservoir, and software of correct revision. (See 7250 Metabolic Monitor
Service and Operator’s Manual)
1.4 Specifications and Other Technical Data
Ventilator technical data, including specifications, characteristics, and requirements, are
listed in Table 1-4 through Table 1-8. Additional performance-related data can be found
in Section 7.
Table 1-4: Physical Characteristics
Dimensions Height Width Depth

(For overall dimensions, refer to Figure 1-5. cm in cm in cm in
Ventilator, stand-alone 42 16.5 55 22.0 57 22.5
Ventilator with pedestal or compressor pedestal 104 41.0 56 22.0 66 26.0
Ventilator with cart 103 40.7 58 23.5 61 24.0
Compressor pedestal or ventilator pedestal 62 24.5 53 21.0 61 24.0
Ventilator cart 61 24.2 58 22.8 61 24.0
Assembly Shipping
Weight (approximate)
kg lb kg lb
Ventilator, stand-alone 65 145 84 185
Ventilator with compressor pedestal 128 285 146* 320
Ventilator with pedestal 109 243 127* 280
Ventilator with cart 98 215 111 245
Compressor pedestal 63 140 92* 202
Ventilator pedestal 44 98 68 150
Ventilator cart 32 70 48 105
* Assumes inclusion of accessory box with service manual and miscellaneous items. Refer to Section 20, “Repacking and
Storage.”
Table 1-5: Environmental Requirements
Environmental Temperature
Operating 10 to 40°C(50 to 104° F)
Storage/shipping -34 to 70°C(-29 to 158° F)
Relative Humidity
Operating 15 to 95%, noncondensing
Storage/shipping 0 to 95%, noncondensing
Clearances for Air Circulation

On all vertical sides 15.0 cm (6.0 in.) minimum
Storage Requirements
Short-term (200 days or less) None
Long-term (over 200 days) Remove batteries
Maximum Altitude
Operating 3,048 m (10,000 ft)
Storage/shipping 15,240 m (50,000 ft)
Table 1-5: Environmental Requirements
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)

Shielding/protection Follow recommended precautions. See Section 8.4.
Table 1-6: Electrical Power Specifications
Electrical Power Specifications
NOTE:
Operating current values assume the use of a Cascade II or equivalent humidifier.
Operating Power
Voltage Frequency
Device current consumption
(V ac) (Hz)
(A rms) (W)
Ventilator module 115 ± 10% 60 ± 5% 3.8 437

100 ± 10% 50 ± 3% 3.4 340
100 ± 10% 60 ± 5% 3.0 300
220 ± 10% 50 ± 3% 1.7 374
220 ± 10% 60 ± 5% 2.0 440
240 ± 10% 50 ± 3% 1.7 408
Ventilator with 115 ± 10% 60 ± 5% 9.0 1035

compressor 100 ± 10% 50 ± 3% 9.8 980
100 ± 10% 60 ± 5% 9.8 980
220 ± 10% 50 ± 3% 4.3 946
220 ± 10% 60 ± 5% 4.3 946
240 ± 10% 50 ± 3% 4.1 984
Miscellaneous Electrical Specifications

Parameter Requirements
Start-up current
115 V ventilator with compressor 20 A
Heat dissipation
Ventilator Approximately 510 BTU/hour
Ventilator with compressor Approximately 2,400 BTU/hour
(where 1 kW = 3,412 BTU/hour)
Leakage current
100/115 V ≤100 µA
220/240 V ≤500 µA
Ground resistance 0.1 Ω
Power supply output

+5 V +4.95 to +5.05 V
+12 V +11.88 to +12.12 V
+15 V +14.85 to +15.15 V
- 15 V -15.15 to -14.85 V
Humidifier outlet power rating 230 W
Power cord (100/115 V units)

Type 125 V hospital-grade; UL- and CSA-approved
Length 3.05 m (10 ft)
Table 1-6: Electrical Power Specifications (continued)
Miscellaneous Electrical Specifications (continued)

Power cord (220/240 V units)
Type 250 V; VDE- and UL-approved
Length 2.5 m (8 ft)
Batteries (2)
Type Lead acid (sealed)
Voltage 2.0 to 2.2 V
Rating 5 A-hr
Power fail module trip point

(see Section 11 for calibration procedure) 82 ±1 V ac
100 V ac 95 ±1 V ac
115 V ac 186 ±1 V ac
220 V ac 204 ±1 V ac
240 V ac
Battery charger voltage

(R84 on interface PCB) +4.5 to +4.6 V
Table 1-7: Pneumatic Specifications
Parameter Requirement
Air/oxygen source flow and pressure 162 - 198 liters per minute (lpm) minimum at 35 -
100 psig
(241-690 kpa)
Air source connector DISS 3/4-16
Oxygen source connector DISS 9/16-18
Oxygen/air line filtering capability 0.3 µm particle (99.98% retention)
Other source gas requirement Medical grade, dry, free of moisture and particles at
ventilator inlet
Regulated air and oxygen pressure 9.9 to 11.0 psig
Monitored flows and volumes (BTPS-corrected) ±20% of setting
Analog meter tolerance ±1% at 0 cmH2O
Delivered oxygen concentration ±3% of setting
BUV air/oxygen tidal volumes (BTPS) (R85 and R86 375 to 625 mL (nominal 500 mL)
on interface PCB)
Other pneumatic component specifications See Table 2-1
Table 1-8: Performance Characteristics
Parameter/Feature Requirement/Characteristic
Ventilation parameters and features
Ventilation modes CMV, SIMV, and CPAP
Inspiration flow waveforms (for Square, descending ramp, sine
mandatory breaths)
Tidal volume 0.1 to 2.5 liters
Respiratory rate 0.5 to 70 bpm
Peak Flow 120 lpm during mandatory breathing
180 lpm during spontaneous breathing
Sensitivity 0.5 to 20 cmH2O below PEEP
Oxygen percentage 21 to 100%
Plateau 0 to 2 seconds
PEEP/CPAP 0 to 45 cmH2O
Sigh (manual and automatic)
Tidal volume 0.1 to 2.5 liters, not to exceed twice tidal volume
Rate 1 to 15 sighs per hour
Number of sighs per event 1 to 3
(automatic sigh only)
Other features 100% oxygen suction for 2 minutes; manual inspiration;
nebulizer with automatic shutoff after 30 minutes
Alarms and thresholds
High airway pressure limit 10 to 120 cmH2O (all units except German) or
10 to 100 cmH2O (German Units)
Low airway pressure (during mandatory 3 to 99 mH2O
breaths)
Low PEEP/CPAP pressure 0 to 45 mH2O
Low exhaled tidal volume 0 to 2.5 liters
Low exhaled minute volume 0 to 60 liters
High respiratory rate 0 to 70 bpm
Sigh high airway pressure limit 10 to 120 cmH2O (all units except German) or 10 to
100 cmH2O (German Units), not to exceed twice high airway
pressure limit for non-sigh breaths
Low oxygen/air inlet pressure Less than 35 psig (241.33 kPa)
Low battery Less than one hour reserve power for audio alarm and battery-
backed RAM
Apnea interval 10 to 60 seconds
Inspiration/exhalation (I:E) ratio Inspiration phase longer than 50% of entire breath cycle
Exhalation valve leak Over 10% of delivered tidal volume or 50 mL ( whichever is
greater) passed through exhalation flow sensor during
inspiration
Power disconnect alarm Power switch is on and ac power is not being delivered
Fan alarm (EMI units only) Fan inoperative
Table 1-8: Performance Characteristics (continued)
Parameter/Feature Requirement/Characteristic
Analog output connector
Alarm silence Silences audible alarm for 2 minutes
Alarm reset Resets ventilator to pre-alarm state of alert
Monitored and displayed parameters Airway pressure (analog), mean airway pressure, peak airway
pressure, PEEP/CPAP pressure, plateau pressure, respiratory
rate, exhaled volume (digital on all units and also analog on
units with basic keyboards), minute volume, spontaneous
minute volume, I:E ratio, type of breath (assist, spontaneous,
sigh, plateau)
Ventilator alarm summary displays Ventilator inoperative, alarm, caution, back-up ventilator, safety
valve open, normal
Safety operating modes Provide temporary ventilatory support with factory- or
operator-set parameters
Back-up ventilation (BUV) Mandatory breaths with tidal volume of 0.5 liter, respiratory
rate of 12 bpm, peak flow of 45 lpm, O2% of 100 if oxygen is
available or 21% otherwise
Apnea ventilation Mandatory breaths with operator-selected parameters from
Disconnect ventilation battery-backed RAM. Default values same as for BUV
Safety valve open, ventilator inoperative Permit patient to breathe room air unassisted by ventilator
Self-tests
Power-On Self-Test (POST) Automatic after power-on, maximum duration of
approximately 10 to 15 seconds
Total Extended Self-Test (EST) Operator-selected, approximately 5-minute duration
Quick EST Operator-selected, 90-second duration
Ongoing checks Automatic, continuous during ventilator operation
I:E ratio check Automatic, with operator-selected parameter changes
Lamp test Operator-selected, 50-second duration
Analog output connector For remote monitoring of pressure and flow waveforms and
nurse call signal. See Figure 3-8 for complete information.
1.5 Recommended Tools and Test Equipment

Tools, test equipment, and materials used to properly service the ventilator and maintain it in
operable condition are listed in Table 1-9. Substituted test equipment may be used, provided
it is equivalent to the recommended test equipment and meets the requirements stated
in Table 1-10.
Tools, test equipment, and materials used for ventilator performance verification are listed in
Table 7-1 and Table 7-2.
NOTE:
Test equipment and tools must be calibrated and inspected periodically to ensure proper
performance and accurate test results.
Table 1-9: Recommended Tools, Test Equipment, and Service Materials
Manufacturer and Model/

Description
Puritan Bennett Part No.
Standard tool kit Local supplier
Drill (for removing riveted serial number plate) Local supplier
Soldering iron and solder Local supplier
Tubing pliers Local supplier
Screwdriver, insulated flat-blade (to adjust potentiometer) Local supplier
0.050-in. hex driver (for removing alarm volume knob) Local supplier
Solenoid wrench 4-003107-00
Digital multimeter (DMM) accurate to 3 decimal places Local supplier
Pneumatic calibration analyzer capable of measuring high Puritan Bennett PTS 2000 or RT-200 (Allied
pressure (psi), low pressure (cmH2O), flow rate (lpm), and Healthcare)
volume (liters BTPS)
NOTE:
A PTS 2000 or RT-200 is required to test
BTPS volumes. Pressure and flow gauges
may be used for other pneumatic
testing.
Barb fitting and nut for pneumatic calibration analyzer 4-008103-00 and 4-003475-00
Electrical safety tester BIO-TEK 501 PRO or equivalent
Oxygen monitor with an accuracy of ±2% PTS 2000, MiniOx 3000 (4-023698-00) or
equivalent
Variable transformer (variac) with ground wire, 0-140 V, Staco Energy Products Co. or equivalent
10 A (100-115 V units), 0-280 V, 5 A (220-240 V units)
Pneumatic test harness (pneumatic chassis harness 4-018089-00
extender) (for regulator adjustment)
EZ minihooks Tektest, Inc., EZ-Hook Division
Stopwatch capable of measuring one-hundredth second Local supplier
Test lung with strap 4-000612-00
Test lung 4-011355-00
Connector, female, 3/4 in. barbed cuff 4-003443-00
Connector, male, 3/4 in. barbed cuff (2) 4-000845-00
Table 1-9: Recommended Tools, Test Equipment, and Service Materials (continued)

Description
Adapter, male, 3/4 in. barbed cuff to 22 mm taper 4-018075-00
Adapter, male, 3/8 in. (10 mm) to 1/4 in. (6 mm) (4) 4-006104-00
Connector, male barb, 1/8 in. (3 mm), nylon (3) 4-018128-00
Connector, male, 1/2 in. (13 mm) (compressor tubing) 4-019362-00
Tee, male barb, 3/16 in. (5 mm) 4-000630-00
Cap 4-001847-00
Air inlet plug (for REG1/REG2 adjustment) 4-019576-00
No. 2 stopper 4-009523-00 or Local supplier
No. 2 stopper with 3/16 in. (5 mm) OD barbed connector 4-003152-00
Test lead connector, 0.025 square pin (for testing power G-061567-00 or equivalent
supply voltages at J14)
Cable straps 4-000003-00 and 4-000004-00
Touch-up paint
Light gray 4-019994-00 (spray lacquer) or
4-017168-00 (liquid)
Blue 4-019995-00 (spray lacquer) or
4-017169-00 (liquid)
Charcoal 4-019996-00 (spray lacquer) or
4-017170-00 (liquid)
Loctite Blue (1/3 oz) 4-003228-00
White silicone adhesive 4-040106-00
General cement 4-004181-00
Torque seal 4-004017-00
Mild detergent Local supplier
Isopropyl alcohol Local supplier
Disinfectant/cleaner Cavicide, Micro-Aseptic Products, Inc.,
Palatine, IL; or equivalent
Leak Detector 4-004489-00 or equivalent meeting
MIL L25567 D specifications
Heat-sink compound 4-004434-00
Cotton swabs Local supplier
Teflon® tape Local supplier
Resistors, two 1 W, totaling 470 Ω (for battery Local supplier
charger voltage calibration)
Pop rivets (for attaching serial number plate) 4-000693-00
Patient tubing circuit See Puritan Bennett product catalog for
ordering information. The use of a Puritan
Bennett patient tubing circuit is
recommended.
Flex tube, 21.3 in. (54.0 cm) (2) 4-005247-00
Table 1-9: Recommended Tools, Test Equipment, and Service Materials (continued)

Description
Static-dissipative field service kit (includes wrist strap, 4-018149-00 or equivalent
static-dissipative mat, and ground cord)
Silicone tubing (bulk)
3/16 in. (5 mm) ID x 3/8 in. (10 mm) OD 4-008575-00
3/16 in. (5 mm) ID x 5/16 in. (8 mm) OD 4-008577-00 (clear) or 4-08584-00 (blue)
(patient pressure)
1/8 in. (3 mm) ID x 1/4 in. (6 mm) OD 4-008578-00
(exhalation valve)
3/8 in. (10 mm) ID x 5/8 in. (16 mm) OD (compressor) 4-008588-00
Electrostatic shielding bags
11 x 14 in. (27.9 x 35.6 cm), for PCBs in card cage 4-009800-00
18 x 14 in. (45.7 x 35.6 cm), for front panel 4-009801-00
display PCB
12 x 8 in. (30.5 x 20.3 cm), for pressure 4-009802-00
transducer PCB
8 x 5 in. (20.3 x 12.7 cm), for RAM chips and PALs 4-009803-00
26 x 4 in. (66.0 x 10.2 cm), for software 4-009804-00
25 x 17 x 26 in. (63.5 x 43.2 x 66.0 cm), for console 4-009816-00
ESD vacuum cleaner with 0.2 µm filter (rated for Local supplier
photocopiers and laser printers)
Table 1-10: Specifications for Equivalent Test Equipment
Type Management Range Accuracy
Pressure to 20 cmH2O ±1.0% of reading

20 to 250 cmH2O ±0.5% of reading
1 to 100 psi ±0.5% of reading
Flow (standard) 0.5 to 4 lpm ±2.0% of reading

10 to 180 lpm ±1.0% of reading
Volume (BTPS-corrected) 0.1 to 3 liters ±1.0% of reading
Voltage
dc ±5 mV to ±15 V ±2.0% of reading
ac 2 to 230 V ±2.0% of reading
1.6 Service Kits
The following kits are available to upgrade the ventilator to the current factory configuration,
to enhance its capabilities, or to perform periodic maintenance. For a list of kit contents,
consult the Parts List.
Table 1-11: Service Kits
Part Number Description
-- Enhanced-Plus console. Replaces the basic or enhanced keyboard with a reorganized keyboard that
allows the operator to more easily select options (80188-based ventilators only).
4-032110-00 English
4-032112-00 French
4-032113-00 German
4-032114-00 Italian
4-032115-00 Japanese
4-032111-00 Spanish
4-027541-00 7200ae Ventilator upgrade kit for the 7250 Metabolic Monitor. Modifies a 7200ae Ventilator so it can
be used with a 7250 Metabolic Monitor. Contents include a Q3 flow sensor with matched EPROM and a
modified ventilator top panel. Later ventilators do not require this kit, but require only a modified top
panel kit.
4-026592-00 Modified top panel kit. Modifies a 7200ae Ventilator so it can be used with a 7250 Metabolic Monitor.
This kit is used in place of the 4-027541-00 upgrade kit
in a ventilator that already has a Q3 EPROM.
4-010986-00 Ventilator appearance kit. Includes contents of rail cover appearance kit, plus rail bumpers and
powder-coated pedestal base covers and top panel.
-- Cabinet and pedestal kits. These kits include the cabinet, pedestal (if applicable), back panel, top panel,
insulation, and appropriate labels and hardware.
4-017120-00 Ventilator cabinet assembly, 100/115 V and earlier 220/240 V
4-017121-00 Ventilator cabinet assembly, later 220/240 V
4-021225-00 Kit, cabinet and pedestal, 100/115 V (non-EMI)
4-021226-00 Kit, cabinet and pedestal, 220/240 V (EMI)
4-025106-00 Display and DCI interface kit (7200a). Adds to the 7200a the cabling needed for the 7202 Display or
the DCI option.
4-017180-00 7202 Display compatibility kit. Permits 7202 Displays to accept the 7200ae Graphics option (Option
60). Not required for displays shipped after January 1991.
4-018253-00 7202 Display upgrade kit. Permits 7202 Displays shipped before January 1991 to operate with either a
7200a or 7200ae Ventilator. Additionally, redesigned housing updates display appearance.
-- Exhalation compartment upgrade kit. Replaces the front-loading exhalation compartment with the
bottom-loading version. An additional upgrade from external exhalation valve to internal valve may be
obtained at the same time.
4-018702-00 115 V ac units
4-018703-00 100 V ac units
4-018701-00 220/240 V ac units
Table 1-11: Service Kits (continued)
Part Number Description
4-018704-00 Internal exhalation valve kit. Available only in conjunction with front-loading to bottom-loading
exhalation compartment upgrade kit.
4-010986-00 Ventilator appearance kit. Includes contents of rail cover appearance kit, plus rail bumpers and powder-
coated pedestal base covers and top panel.
4-018733-00 Rail cover appearance kit. Includes covers and bumpers.
4-026080-00 Fan door kit. Can be used to add louvered door to older ventilator models or to replace door assembly
for cosmetic purposes. Includes all components that comprise fan door, except fan. Door is powder-
coated.
4-018049-00 Pulsed audio alarm kit. Changes the audio alarm from one with a continuous tone to one with a pulsed
tone.
4-018255-00 Caster upgrade kit. Upgrades side-brake casters top-locking casters for the pedestal or compressor
pedestal. The kit includes spacer plates and four casters (two with brakes, two without brakes).
4-018413-00 Stop bracket kit. Modifies the ventilator cooling fan door to allow the operator to access the electronics
cooling fan filter. The stop bracket kit must be used with a modified back panel (with screws holding side
door in place).
4-026209-00 Pedestal bumper kit. Replaces the one-piece early-style bumper with the multi-piece bumper with
ribbed corners.
4-018071-00 Flex arm reinforcement kit. Reinforces flex arm’s join to the ventilator. Useful in 1983, 1984, and 1985
versions.
Preventive maintenance kits. Order the following kits to perform ventilator and compressor
compartment preventive maintenance. Refer to the ventilator elapsed time meter (Figure 4-1) to
determine when the ventilator unit requires service. Refer to the compressor elapsed time meter (Figure
4-1) to determine when the compressor compartment requires service.
4-020271-00 2,500-hour, ventilator unit only (Enhanced or Enhanced-Plus keyboard)
4-020291-00 2,500-hour, ventilator unit only (Basic keyboard)
4-020790-00 10,000-hour, ventilator unit only, 115 V
4-020803-00 10,000-hour, ventilator unit only, 100 V
4-020804-00 10,000-hour, ventilator unit only, 220/240 V
4-020292-00 2,500-hour, compressor compartment
4-020791-00 10,000-hour, compressor compartment, 115 V/60 Hz
4-020801-00 10,000-hour, compressor compartment, 220/240 V/50 Hz
4-020802-00 10,000-hour, compressor compartment, 220/240 V/60 Hz
4-020900-00 Spare part kit. Provides optimum service capability while keeping cost to a minimum.
1.7 Controls and Indicators
Operating the ventilator involves setting the controls and observing indicators on the
ventilator front panel. These controls and indicators are shown in Figure 1-2 through Figure
1-4. Their descriptions are detailed in Table 1-12.
Table 1-12: Controls and Indicators
Ventilator Settings
Control/Indicator B E E+ Function
Special function select keys
<100% O2 SUCTION> x x x Switches ventilation to 100% oxygen for two minutes.
<MANUAL INSPIRATION> x x x Delivers one operator-initiated mandatory breath.
<MANUAL SIGH> x x x Delivers one operator-initiated sigh breath.
<AUTOMATIC SIGH> x x x Selects automatic delivery of sigh breaths with operator-selected

quantity, rate, tidal volume, and high-pressure limit.
<NEBULIZER> x x x Turns on the nebulizer. Automatically cancels after 30 minutes.
<++> x x x Selects option or other special function.
Mode select keys
<CMV> x x x Selects continuous mandatory ventilation mode.
<SIMV> x x x Selects synchronous intermittent mandatory ventilation mode.
<CPAP> x x x Selects continuous positive airway pressure mode.
Waveform select keys
Square wave x x x Selects square waveform for all mandatory breaths.
Descending ramp x x x Selects descending ramp waveform for all mandatory breaths.
Sine wave x x x Selects sine waveform for all mandatory breaths.
Parameter select keys
<TIDAL VOLUME> x x x Sets tidal volume for mandatory inspirations except sigh breaths.
<RESPIRATORY RATE> x x x Sets CMV and SIMV respiratory rates.
<PEAK INSPIRATORY FLOW> x x x Sets peak inspiratory flow for mandatory breaths.
Range: 10 to 120 lpm.
<SENSITIVITY> x x x Sets the airway pressure below PEEP that patient must produce to
trigger a patient-initiated mandatory or spontaneous breath.
Range: 0.5 to 20 cmH2O below PEEP.
<O2%> x x x Sets oxygen percentage in delivered gas mixture.

Range: 21 to 100%.
<PLATEAU> x x Sets inspiratory pause after delivery of all mandatory breaths.

Range: 0 to 2 seconds.
<PEEP/CPAP> control knob x x x Sets the level of Positive-End Expiratory Pressure.

Range: 0 to 45 cmH2O.
Legend: B =Basic keyboard

E =Enhanced keyboard
E+ =Enhanced-Plus keyboard
Table 1-12: Controls and Indicators (continued)

Ventilator Settings (continued)
Alarm threshold keys
<HIGH PRESSURE LIMIT> x x x Sets upper limit of airway pressure that will trigger alarm during
any non-sigh breath.
<LOW INSPIRATION PRESSURE> x x x Sets lower limit of airway pressure that will trigger alarm
during any mandatory breath.
<LOW PEEP/CPAP PRESSURE> x x x Sets lower limit of PEEP/CPAP pressure that will trigger
alarm during any breath.
<LOW EXHALED TIDAL VOL> x x x Sets lower limit of exhaled tidal volume that will trigger alarm.
<LOW EXHALED MINUTE VOL> x x x Sets lower limit of exhaled minute volume that will trigger
alarm.
<HIGH RESPIRATORY RATE> x x x Sets upper limit of monitored respiratory rate that will trigger
alarm.
Option keys
NOTE:
The keys available depend on the options installed.
<APNEA PARAMETERS> x Initiates setting of apnea parameters.
<AUTO PEEP> x Initiates setting of Auto-PEEP parameters.
<PRESSURE SUPPORT> x Activates Pressure Support (Option 10).
<DCI 2.0> x Activates DCI 2.0 (Digital Communications Interface) (Option

20).
<RESPIRATORY MECHANICS> x Activates Respiratory Mechanics/Monitoring (Option 30/40).
<FLOW BY 2.0> x Activates Flow-by 2.0 (Option 50).
<GRAPHICS 2.0> x Activates Graphics 2.0 (Option 60).
<PRESSURE CONTROL> x Activates Pressure Control Ventilation (Option 80).
Patient Data
Digital displays
TIDAL VOL liters x x x Displays current BTPS-compensated tidal volume setting.
SET RATE bpm x x x Displays current respiratory rate setting.
PEAK FLOW lpm x x x Displays current peak inspiratory flow setting.
O2 % x x x Displays current oxygen percentage setting.
Message display window x x x Displays operator prompts, values for parameters and alarm
(20-character) thresholds, and error messages.
PEEP/CPAP cmH2O x Displays current PEEP/CPAP reading.


Patient Data (continued)
Breath-type indicators
ASSIST x x x Lights during inspiratory phase of a patient-initiated mandatory

breath cycle.
SPONTANEOUS x x x Lights during inspiratory phase of a spontaneous breath cycle.
SIGH x x x Lights during the entire sigh breath cycle.
PLATEAU x x x Lights during an inspiratory pause.
Analog display (or bar graph display)
<AIRWAY PRESSURE cmH2O> x Selects airway pressure.
<EXHALED VOLUME liters> x Selects exhaled volume.
NOTE:
In ventilators with Enhanced keyboards, the analog meter
always displays airway pressure. There are no controls to
change the display.
<PRESSURE SCALE HIGH/LOW> x Toggles AIRWAY PRESSURE cmH2O display between HIGH (-20
to 120 cmH2O) and LOW (-10 to 60 cmH2O) ranges.
Ventilator Status
Alarm control keys
<LAMP TEST> x x x Allows operator to check all lamps and displays on the front
panel.
<ALARM SILENCE> x x x Turns off the audible alarm for 2 minutes.
<ALARM RESET> x x x Clears all alarm indicators and initiates a battery test.
Alarm indicators
HIGH PRESSURE LIMIT x x x Indicates that airway pressure equals or exceeds the alarm
setpoint (10 to 120 cmH2O for all units except German; or 10
to 100 cmH2O for German units).
LOW INSPIRATORY PRESSURE x x x Indicates that airway pressure during a mandatory breath is
equal to or less than the alarm setpoint (3 to 99 cmH2O).
LOW PEEP/CPAP PRESSURE x x x Indicates that monitored PEEP/CPAP pressure is below alarm
setpoint (0 to 45 cmH2O).
LOW EXHALED TIDAL VOLUME x x x Indicates that the four-breath running average for tidal volume
is equal to or less than the alarm setpoint (0 to 2.5 liters).
LOW EXHALED MINUTE VOLUME x x x Indicates that the 8-breath running calculation of minute
volume is equal to or less than the alarm setpoint (0 to 60 liters).
HIGH RESPIRATORY RATE x x x Indicates that the 10-breath running average for respiratory
rate equals or exceeds the setpoint (0 to 70 bpm).
I:E x x x Indicates that the duration of inspiration is 50% or more of the

total breath cycle.
Ventilator Status (continued)
APNEA x x x Indicates that no breath was detected during the

operator-selected apnea interval (10-60 seconds).
LOW PRESSURE O2 INLET x x x Indicates that inlet pressure for the oxygen supply is less than
35 psig (241.33 kPa).
LOW PRESSURE AIR INLET x x x Indicates that inlet pressure for the air supply is less than 35 psig
(241.33 kPa).
EXHALATION VALVE LEAK x x x Indicates that more than 10% of the delivered tidal volume or
50 mL (whichever is greater) passed through the exhalation
flow sensor during inspiration.
LOW BATTERY x x x Indicates that internal battery power is too low to sustain one
hour of audible alarm operation, the batteries are overcharged,
or R84 on the interface PCB is adjusted too high.
Power disconnect alarm (audible only) x x x Indicates power switch is on, but ac power is not being
delivered.
Alarm summary display

VENT INOP (ventilator inoperative) x x x Indicates the ventilator is non-operational.
(red)
VENTILATOR ALARM or ALARM (red) x x x Indicates that an alarm was triggered.
CAUTION (yellow) x x x Indicates that an alarm was triggered but is no longer active.
BACK UP VENTILATOR (red) x x x Indicates the ventilator is in the backup ventilator emergency
mode.
SAFETY VALVE OPEN (red) x x x Indicates that the patient system was opened to atmosphere
and that the patient is breathing unassisted by the ventilator.
NORMAL (green) x x x Indicates that no alarm or caution states exist.
Utility Panel
Alarm volume x x x Adjusts the audible alarm loudness.
<EST> x x x Initiates Extended Self-Test (EST).
Power x x x Turns ventilator on and off.
<RESET> x x x Resets the circuit breaker after it trips.
Analog output connector x x x Allows for strip-chart recording for flow and pressure signals
and for controlling a nurse call device.

APNEA PRESSURE RESPIRATORY PRESSURE TIDAL VOL. liters

AUTO PEEP DCI 2.0 FLOW BY 2.0 GRAPHICS 2.0
PARAMETERS SUPPORT MECHANICS CONTROL
Ventilator setting digital displays
PEEP/CPAP cmH2O SET RATE bpm

Ventilator setting
digital displays
VENTILATOR SETTINGS
PEEP/CPAP PEAK FLOW lpm O2 %
control
PATIENT DATA VENTILATOR
ASSIST STATUS
SPONTANEOUS
Breath-type
AIRWAY indicators Message display window
PRESSURE SIGH
cmH2O
PLATEAU
60
Alarm
110 Digital
indicators
displays
HIGH PRESSURE
50 LIMIT
cmH2O LOW INSPIRATORY

PRESSURE
90
8 LOW PEEP/CPAP
7 9 PRESSURE
40 4 5 6 VENT INOP LOW EXHALED

TIDAL VOLUME
VENTILATOR
1 2 3 LOW EXHALED
70 MEAN PEAK ALARM MINUTE VOLUME
AIRWAY AIRWAY
PRESSURE PRESSURE
0 CAUTION Alarm HIGH RESPIRATORY
* RATE
30 BACK UP
summary
I:E
PLATEAU
LAMP display
PRESSURE
TEST Diagnostic
50 APNEA
SAFETY
LOW PRESSURE
RATE/I:E O2 INLET
20
NORMAL LOW PRESSURE
AIR INLET
30 EXHALATION
VALVE LEAK
LOW BATTERY
10 RATE I:E
ALARM
SILENCE
Alarm
bpm RATIO control
10
TIDAL RESPIRATORY PEAK ALARM keys
VOLUME RATE INSPIRATORY RESET
liters FLOW 8
0
7 9
SENSITIVITY O2 % PLATEAU 4 5 6
Parameter select keys 1 2 3

-10 SPONT.
MINUTE MINUTE
VOLUME VOLUME CMV SIMV CPAP
0
PRESSURE
TIDAL
HIGH
PRESSURE
LOW
INSPIRATION
LOW
PEEP/CPAP 100% O2
*
SCALE
HIGH/LOW VOLUME LIMIT PRESSURE PRESSURE Mode select keys SUCTION
ENTER CLEAR
LOW LOW HIGH MANUAL MANUAL AUTOMATIC
EXHALED EXHALED RESPIRATORY INSPIRATION SIGH NEBULIZER
SIGH
TIDAL VOL MINUTE VOL RATE
Numeric keypad
2-00218
Special function keys
Alarm threshold select keys Waveform select keys
Figure 1-2. Enhanced-Plus Keyboard Controls

and Indicators
This page is intentionally blank
Analog display PEEP/CPAP TIDAL VOL. liters
1cmH2O≈1mbar 40 60 cmH2O
20 80 (mbar)
0 100
4 6
-20 2 8 120 PEEP/CPAP SET RATE bpm
0 10 control Ventialtor setting
-2 kPa 12 digital displays
AIRWAY PRESSURE
PEAK FLOW lpm O2%
PATIENT DATA VENTILATOR SETTINGS VENTILATOR

STATUS
cmH2O
Messagye display window
Digital
displays
MEAN PEAK
AIRWAY AIRWAY
PRESSURE PRESSURE
HIGH PRESSURE
LIMIT
PEEP/ PLATEAU Alarm LOW INSPIRATORY
CPAP PRESSURE
indicators PRESSURE
LOW PEEP/CPAP
PRESSURE
RATE/I:E
LOW EXHALED
TIDAL VOLUME
LOW EXHALED
VENT INOP MINUTE VOLUME
ASSIST HIGH RESPIRATORY

VENTILATOR RATE
ALARM Alarm
RATE I:E I:E
bpm RATIO SPONTANEOUS summary
Breath-type CAUTION
display APNEA
indicators BACK UP
SIGH
LOW PRESSURE
liters VENTILATOR
O2 INLET
SAFETY LOW PRESSURE

PLATEAU
AIR INLET
VALVE OPEN
EXHALATION
NORMAL VALVE LEAK
LOW BATTERY
SPONT.
TIDAL MINUTE MINUTE
VOLUME VOLUME VOLUME
LAMP
TEST
Diagnostic
TIDAL RESPIRATORY PEAK
VOLUME RATE INSPIRATORY
FLOW
ALARM
SILENCE Alarm
SENSITIVITY O2 % PLATEAU
control
ALARM
RESET
keys
Parameter select keys CMV SIMV CPAP
HIGH LOW LOW Mode select keys 100% O2

PRESSURE INSPIRATION PEEP/CPAP SUCTION
LIMIT PRESSURE PRESSURE
MANUAL MANUAL AUTOMATIC ENTER CLEAR

LOW LOW HIGH NEBULIZER
INSPIRATION SIGH SIGH 2-00219
EXHALED EXHALED RESPIRATORY
Numeric keypad
Waveform select keys Special function keys
Alarm threshold select keys
Figure 1-3. Enhanced Keyboard Controls and Indicators
1.8 Location of Serial Number

The serial number plate is located beneath the exhalation compartment in ventilators with
bottom-loading exhalation compartments. It is located inside the exhalation compartment in
ventilators with front-loading compartments.
1.9 Warranty and Service Information

The ventilator is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for under
conditions of normal use. The length of the warranty is determined at the time of sale. For
extended warranty and service contracts, call 1-800-672-2599.
In the USA, direct requests for parts, literature, ventilator service, technical support, or service
training to 1-800-255-6774.
Outside the USA, contact your local Puritan Bennett representative.
1.10 Reference Documentation

Service Manuals
4-022396-00 7250 Metabolic Monitor Service and Operator’s Manual, English
Operator’s Manuals
4-023576-00 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual, English (7200ae)
4-023577-00 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual, French (7200ae)
4-023578-00 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual, German (7200ae)
4-023579-00 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual, Spanish (7200ae)
4-023580-00 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual, Italian (7200ae)
4-020500-00 7200 Series Microprocessor Ventilator Operator’s Manual, English (7200a)
4-020628-00 7200 Series Microprocessor Ventilator Operator’s Manual, Italian (7200a)
4-020627-00 7200 Series Microprocessor Ventilator Operator’s Manual, Spanish (7200a)
4-020523-00 Pressure Support (Option 10) Appendix, English
4-020629-00 Pressure Support (Option 10) Appendix, French
4-020630-00 Pressure Support (Option 10) Appendix, German
4-020632-00 Pressure Support (Option 10) Appendix, Italian
4-020631-00 Pressure Support (Option 10) Appendix, Spanish
4-020521-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI) (Option 20) Appendix, English
4-020633-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI) (Option 20) Appendix, French
4-020634-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI) (Option 20) Appendix, German
4-020636-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI) (Option 20) Appendix, Italian
4-020635-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI) (Option 20) Appendix, Spanish
4-022420-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI 2.0) (Option 20) Appendix, English
4-022430-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI 2.0) (Option 20) Appendix, French
4-022431-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI 2.0) (Option 20) Appendix, German
4-022433-00 Digital Communications Interface (DCI 2.0) (Option 20) Appendix, Italian
4-020522-00 Respiratory Mechanics/Monitoring (Option 30/40) Appendix, English
4-020637-00 Respiratory Mechanics/Monitoring (Option 30/40) Appendix, French
4-020638-00 Respiratory Mechanics/Monitoring (Option 30/40) Appendix, German
4-020640-00 Respiratory Mechanics/Monitoring (Option 30/40) Appendix, Italian
4-020639-00 Respiratory Mechanics/Monitoring (Option 30/40) Appendix, Spanish
4-020535-00 Flow-by (Option 50) Appendix, English
4-020641-00 Flow-by (Option 50) Appendix, French
4-020642-00 Flow-by (Option 50) Appendix, German
4-020644-00 Flow-by (Option 50) Appendix, Italian
4-020643-00 Flow-by (Option 50) Appendix, Spanish
Breath-type indicators PEEP/CPAP Digital display

AIRWAY
PRESSURE
cmH 2 O
millibars ASSIST SPONTANEOUS control
30 40 50 60 70
20 80 cmH2O RATE/I:E
10 90
0 1.0 1.5 100
-10 .5 2.0 110
-20 0 2.5 120
EXHALED 1 cmH 2 O 1 millibar
VOLUME liters SIGH PLATEAU
MEAN PEAK
Analog PEEP/CPAP AIRWAY AIRWAY RATE I:E
PRESSURE PRESSURE bpm RATIO
display AIRWAY EXHALED
PRESSURE VOLUME
cmH2O liters
PEEP/ PLATEAU liters
CPAP PRESSURE
PATIENT DATA TIDAL MINUTE SPONT.

VOLUME VOLUME MINUTE
VOLUME
Alarm indicators
HIGH LOW LOW

PRESSURE EXHALED PRESSURE
LIMIT TIDAL VOL O2 INLET
Alarm summary display LOW LOW LOW Digital display

INSPIRATORY EXHALED PRESSURE
PRESSURE MINUTE VOL AIR INLET
VENTILATOR
INOPERATIVE LOW HIGH
LOW
PEEP/CPAP RESPIRATORY
BATTERY VENTILATOR VENTILATOR TIDAL VOL. liters SET RATE bpm
PRESSURE RATE
ALARM STATUS SETTINGS
EXHALATION
CAUTION APNEA I:E VALVE
LEAK
BACK UP VENTILATOR PEAK FLOW lpm O2%
SAFETY VALVE OPEN
LAMP
NORMAL TEST
Diagnostic
Message display window
ALARM ALARM
SILENCE RESET
Alarm control keys
100% O2 MANUAL MANUAL AUTOMATIC

INSPIRATION SIGH NEBULIZER
SUCTION SIGH
HIGH LOW LOW
PRESSURE INSPIRATION PEEP/CPAP
Special function keys
VOLUME RATE INSPIRATORY LOW LOW HIGH
FLOW EXHALED EXHALED RESPIRATORY
TIDAL VOL MINUTE VOL RATE ENTER CLEAR
CMV SIMV CPAP Alarm threshold select keys Numeric keypad
2-00220
Mode select keys Waveform select keys Parameter select keys
Figure 1-4. Basic Keyboard Controls and Indicators
Operator’s Manuals, continued

4-022335-00 Flow-by 2.0 (Option 50) Appendix, English
4-022399-00 Flow-by 2.0 (Option 50) Appendix, French
4-022398-00 Flow-by 2.0 (Option 50) Appendix, German
4-022400-00 Flow-by 2.0 (Option 50) Appendix, Italian
4-020659-00 Graphics (Option 60) Appendix, English
4-021576-00 Graphics (Option 60) Appendix, French
4-022085-00 Graphics (Option 60) Appendix, German
4-022087-00 Graphics (Option 60) Appendix, Italian
4-022421-00 Graphics 2.0 (Option 60) Appendix, English
4-022434-00 Graphics 2.0 (Option 60) Appendix, French
4-022435-00 Graphics 2.0 (Option 60) Appendix, German
4-022437-00 Graphics 2.0 (Option 60) Appendix, Italian
4-020576-00 Pressure Control Ventilation (Option 80) Appendix, English
4-020653-00 Pressure Control Ventilation (Option 80) Appendix, French
4-020654-00 Pressure Control Ventilation (Option 80) Appendix, German
4-020656-00 Pressure Control Ventilation (Option 80) Appendix, Italian
4-020615-00 Pulse Oximetry (Option 90) Appendix, English
4-020663-00 Pulse Oximetry (Option 90) Appendix, French
4-020666-00 Pulse Oximetry (Option 90) Appendix, Italian
4-020547-00 7202 Display Appendix, English
4-020645-00 7202 Display Appendix, French
4-022646-00 7202 Display Appendix, German
4-020648-00 7202 Display Appendix, Italian
4-020647-00 7202 Display Appendix, Spanish
4-022395-00 7250 Metabolic Monitor Operator’s Manual, English
4-022452-00 7250 Metabolic Monitor Operator’s Manual, French
4-022453-00 7250 Metabolic Monitor Operator’s Manual, German
4-022454-00 7250 Metabolic Monitor Operator’s Manual, Italian
4-022455-00 7250 Metabolic Monitor Operator’s Manual, Spanish
7200a Appendixes Binder

Holds appendixes to 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual. (7200a only. Not needed
for 7200ae.)
4-022074-00 Binder, Appendixes, English
Ventilator
Side view Front view
Ventilator with
Compressor Pedestal or
Ventilator Pedestal
Ventilator with Ventilator

Cart
2-00221
Figure 1-5. Ventilator Dimensions
SECTION
SECTION
Theory of Operation 2 2
This section details the operational theory of the 7200 Series Ventilator. It begins by
describing the overall operation of the ventilator and continues by describing the pneumatic
system, including the individual components and their operations as subsystems. Next, it
describes the electrical system, including the operations of the printed circuit boards (PCBs).
Finally, the operational descriptions define the interactions between all ventilator
components during various types of operation.
For a clinical theory of operation, consult the 7200 Series Operator’s Manual.
2.1 Overview of Ventilator Operation

The 7200 Series Ventilator consists of two major systems: the pneumatic system and the
electrical system. The pneumatic system, under control of the microprocessor in the electrical
system, supplies air and oxygen to the patient system external to the ventilator. Air for
delivery to the patient and to operate the pneumatic components is provided by an external
supply or by an optional compressor. Oxygen is provided by an external supply source.
The pneumatic system consists of two parallel pneumatic gas circuits: one for oxygen and one
for air. An important element of the pneumatic system is the two proportional solenoid
valves (PSOLs), which precisely control the flow delivered to the patient. Air and oxygen flow
sensors provide feedback, which is used by the microprocessor (CPU) to control the PSOLs. As
a result, the ventilator is able to supply air and oxygen to a patient according to requirements
preselected by an operator at the ventilator keyboard. The output of mixed air and oxygen
passes through a patient system external to the ventilator; this patient system may be
composed of tubing, filters, a nebulizer, water traps, and a humidifier. The patient exhales the
gas through the opened exhalation valve. This exhalation valve is part of the ventilator in
units equipped with internal exhalation valves. For ventilators without this internal valve,
the exhalation valve is part of the patient system.
The electrical system includes a card cage, housing four to six PCBs. If the ventilator is a later
model based on the Intel 80188 Microprocessor, the CPU control, memory, and display
control functions are combined into two PCBs. In earlier models these functions exist on
three PCBs. Additionally, an optional pulse oximetry PCB is available. Initial instructions and
data for microprocessor use are entered by the operator via the ventilator keyboard. The data
is then stored in the ventilator memory. The CPU uses the stored data to control and monitor
the desired flow of gas to the patient system.
Power to operate the ventilator comes from three power supplies providing +5 V, +12 V, and
±15 V outputs. Also, a rechargeable battery unit supplies standby power to operate the alarm
and to maintain critical ventilator data in memory during a power interruption.
2.2 Pneumatic System

The pneumatic system, shown in Figure 2-1 (with internal exhalation valve) or Figure 2-2
(with external exhalation valve), includes these systems: wall gas (compressed air and
oxygen) supply, compressor, flow control, exhalation, PEEP/CPAP (positive end expiratory
pressure/continuous positive airway pressure), safety valve, and patient.
Table 2-1 provides some pertinent specifications and other data for some of the ventilator’s
pneumatic components.
Table 2-1: Pneumatic Components Data
Reference
Component Data
Designator
Oxygen or air check valve CV1/CV2 ––
Safety valve check valve CV3 ––
Compressor check valve CV4 ––
Exhalation check valve CV5 ––
Exhalation pilot pressure checkvalves CV6/CV7 ––
Differential pressure transducer DP -20 to 140 cmH2O
Oxygen or air filter F1/F3 >0.3 µm retention
Oxygen or air filter F2/F4 >20 µm retention
Compressor inlet filter F5 >10 to 50 µm retention
Compressor outlet filter F6 >0.3 µm retention
Pilot pressure outlet filter F7 0.3 µm nominal retention at flow of 10 lpm
Damping restrictor filter F8 0.3 µm nominal retention at flow of 10 lpm
Patient pressure bacteria filter F9 0.3 µm nominal retention at flow of 10 lpm
Oxygen or air screen filter F10/F11 >75 µm retention
Jet venturi JV With REG5, adjusts PEEP proportional pressure to between 0

and 41 cmH2O
PEEP/CPAP pressure transducer P1 0 to 41 cmH2O
Absolute pressure transducer P2 10 to 17 psi
Oxygen or air pressure switch PS1/PS2 Opens: pressure <35 psig (241.33 kPa) nominal
Closes: pressure >35 psig (241.33 kPa) nominal
Compressor pressure switch PS3 Opens: <7.5 psig (51.71 kPa) nominal
Closes: >7.5 psig (51.71 kPa) nominal
BUV pressure switch PS4 Opens: Pressure <30 cmH2O nominal

Closes: Pressure >30 cmH2O nominal
Oxygen or air flow proportional PSOL1/PSOL2 0 to 385 mA at 0 lpm; 250 to 604 mA at 100 lpm; 420 to
solenoid valves 630 mA at 180 lpm
Oxygen flow and temperature sensors Q1/T1 Measures flows between 0 and 226 lpm at temperatures of 15
to 60 °C
Air flow and temperature sensors Q2/T2 Measures flows between 0 and 226 lpm at temperatures of 15
to 60 °C
Exhalation flow and temperature Q3/T3 Measures flows between 0 and 226 lpm at temperatures of 15
sensors to 60 °C
Safety valve pilot restrictor R1 0.126 in. (3.2 mm) ID
Safety valve pilot restrictor R2 0.0160 in. (0.41 mm) ID (violet)
Theory of Operation 2
Reference
Component Data
Designator
Adjustable restrictor R3 <41 cmH2O output
Damping restrictor R4 0.020 in. (0.51 mm) ID (gold)
P2 inlet damping restrictor R5 0.126 in. (3.2 mm) ID
Exhalation pilot pressure restrictor R6 0.0125 in. (0.32 mm) ID (blue). Provides >14 cmH2O to
exhalation drive line
Exhalation pilot pressure restrictor R7 0.0350 in. (0.89 mm) ID (green). Provides >14 cmH2O to
exhalation drive line
Oxygen or air regulator REG1/REG2 Output of 10 psig (68.95 kPa) at 35-100 psig (241.33 to
689.50 kPa)
Compressor back pressure regulator REG3 Output of 10 psig (68.95 kPa) at flow <120 lpm
Safety valve back pressure regulator REG4 Output of nominal 60 cmH2O at SOL5 connection
PEEP/CPAP regulator REG5 Output of 0 to approximately 52 cmH2O at input pressure of 10

psig (68.95 kPa) nominal
Oxygen nebulizer solenoid valve SOL1 +12 V, two-way

De-energized: Oxygen percentage <60
Energized: Oxygen percentage >60
Air nebulizer solenoid valve SOL2 +12 V, two-way

De-energized: Oxygen percentage>60
Energized: Oxygen percentage <60
Cross-over solenoid valve SOL3 +12 V, three-way

De-energized: When wall air >35 psig (241.33 kPa) or
compressor air >8 psi (55.16 kPa)
Energized: When wall air <35 psig (241.33 kPa) and compressor
air <8 psi (55.16 kPa), or during BUV when oxygen >35 psig
(241.33 kPa)
Exhalation pilot control solenoid valve SOL4 +12 V, three-way

De-energized: During exhalation
Energized: During inspiration
Safety valve solenoid valve SOL5 +12 V, three-way

De-energized: During safety valve open condition, power-
down, or when system fault detected
Energized: During normal operation and BUV
DP autozero solenoid valve SOL6 +6 V, three-way (supplied with +12 V)

De-energized: Except when DP is autozeroed
Energized: When DP is autozeroed (every minute for first 10
minutes of ventilator operation and hourly after that)
PEEP/CPAP solenoid valve SOL7 +12 V, three-way

De-energized: During SVO, power-down, or when fault
detected
Energized: Normally
P1 autozero solenoid valve SOL8 +6 V, three-way (supplied with +12 V)

De-energized: Except when P1 is autozeroed
Energized: When P1 is autozeroed (every minute for first 10
minutes and hourly after that)
Reference
Component Data
Designator
Compressor unloading solenoid valve SOL9 +12 V, two-way

De-energized: When compressor is on (except during startup)
Energized: When compressor starts up
Safety valve SV Passively relieves: >115 to 150 cmH2O

Opens: Catastrophic ventilator failure such as power failure
Compressor Output of 120 lpm at 10 psi (68.95 kPa)
Main flow bacteria filter >0.3 µm retention at flow of 100 lpm
PATIENT SYSTEM
PNEUMATIC COMPARTMENT
NEBULIZER
BACTERIA FILTER
O2 REGULATOR
REG 1
P1
O2 FILTER O2 FLOW AND
O2 CHECK TEMPERATURE ABSOLUTE NEBULIZER
F2 SOL PRESSURE
VALVE O2 SCREEN SENSORS 1 P2
CV1 FILTER F11 TRANSDUCER
P2
O2 R5
Q1/T1 P2 INLET
NEBULIZER DAMPING
CROSS-OVER SOLENOID SOLENOID RESTRICTOR CV3
50 PSI O2 SAFETY/CHECK
VALVE MAIN FLOW INSPIRATORY
O2 PRESSURE VENT PSOL 1 BACTERIA
PROPORTIONAL LIMB
SWITCH NC SOL C SILENCER FILTER
O2 WATER PS1 AIR 3 SOLENOID VENT MANIFOLD VENT
TRAP AND REGULATOR VALVE
ASSEMBLY NEBULIZER
FILTER F1 REG 2
NO EXHALATION
AIR FLOW AND PSOL 2 PILOT HUMIDIFIER
AIR PRESSURE SV
FILTER AIR CHECK TEMPERATURE SOL
VALVE AIR SCREEN SENSORS 2 NETWORK OUT
FILTER F10 R7
CV2 CV6
F4 AIR
Q2/T2 IN
SOL5 SAFETY
NEBULIZER CV7 VALVE SOLENOID SAFETY VALVE
SOLENOID BACK PRESSURE
50 PSI AIR F7 REGULATOR
AIR R2 SAFETY VALVE
PRESSURE PILOT PILOT RESTRICTOR
AIR WATER SWITCH PRESSURE R6
TRAP AND PS2 OUTLET SAFETY VALVE REG 4
FILTER F3 FILTER PILOT RESTRICTOR
COMPRESSOR PRESSURE R1
SWITCH PS3 DP PATIENT
CV4 ADJUSTABLE AUTOZERO
COMPRESSOR NO RESTRICTOR SOLENOID
CHECK VALVE R3 SOL6
REG
IN OUT 5 IN OUT
COMPRESSOR F8 DAMPING EXHALATION
BACK JV JET VENTURI RESTRICTOR PILOT
SOL PRESSURE FILTER CONTROL BUV
SOL7 PEEP/CPAP SOLENOID NC
9 REGULATOR PEEP/ P1 PS4 PRESSURE
REGULATOR SWITCH
CPAP SOL
SOLENOID 4 DP
COMPRESSOR PEEP/CPAP R4 C
UNLOADING PRESSURE P1 DAMPING AIR
RESTRICTOR CAPACITOR P2
SOLENOID REG 3 TRANSDUCER DIFFERENTIAL
NO
P2 PRESSURE
SOL8 TRANSDUCER
P1 AUTOZERO SOLENOID
HEAT
EXCHANGER F6 F5 OUT IN
OUTLET INLET
FILTER OUT IN FILTER EXHALATION CHECK VALVE EXPIRATORY
VALVE CV5 LIMB
MC
INLET Q3/T3
SILENCER
PULSATION DAMPER COMPRESSOR EXHALATION FLOW
AND TEMPERATURE HEATED COLLECTOR
COMPRESSOR/PEDESTAL EXHALATION SENSORS BACTERIA FILTER VIAL
COMPARTMENT (OPTIONAL) COMPARTMENT
LEGEND:
NO = Normally Open
2-00222
NC = Normally Closed
C = Common (when energized, the gas
flow can be between C and NC)
Figure 2-1. Pneumatic System Diagram

(Internal Exhalation Valve)
This page intentionally blank
PATIENT SYSTEM
NEBULIZER
BACTERIA FILTER
O2 REGULATOR
REG 1
P1
TEMPERATURE ABSOLUTE NEBULIZER
F2 O2 CHECK SOL PRESSURE
VALVE O2 SCREEN SENSORS P2
1 TRANSDUCER
CV1 FILTER F11 P2
O2 R5
Q1/T1 P2 INLET
NEBULIZER DAMPING
CROSS-OVER SOLENOID SOLENOID RESTRICTOR CV3
50 PSI O2 SAFETY/CHECK MAIN FLOW INSPIRATORY
O2 PRESSURE VENT PSOL 1 VALVE BACTERIA
PROPORTIONAL LIMB
SWITCH NC SOL C SILENCER FILTER
O2 WATER PS1 AIR 3 SOLENOID VENT MANIFOLD VENT
ASSEMBLY NEBULIZER
FILTER F1 REG 2
NO
AIR AIR FLOW AND PSOL 2 SV HUMIDIFIER
FILTER AIR CHECK TEMPERATURE SOL
VALVE AIR SCREEN SENSORS 2
FILTER F10 OUT
CV2
F4 AIR
Q2/T2 IN SOL5 SAFETY
NEBULIZER VALVE SOLENOID SAFETY VALVE
50 PSI AIR F7 REGULATOR
AIR R2 SAFETY VALVE
PRESSURE PILOT F9
PILOT RESTRICTOR PATIENT
AIR WATER SWITCH PRESSURE
PS2 OUTLET REG 4 PRESSURE
TRAP AND SAFETY VALVE
FILTER PILOT RESTRICTOR FILTER
FILTER F3
COMPRESSOR PRESSURE R1
SWITCH PS3 DP PATIENT
CV4 ADJUSTABLE AUTOZERO PATIENT
COMPRESSOR RESTRICTOR
CHECK VALVE
NO
R3
SOLENOID PRESSURE
SOL6
REG PATIENT
IN OUT 5 IN OUT PRESSURE
COMPRESSOR F8 DAMPING EXHALATION
BACK JV JET VENTURI RESTRICTOR PILOT WATER TRAP
SOL PRESSURE FILTER CONTROL BUV
SOL7 PEEP/CPAP SOLENOID NC
9 REGULATOR PEEP/ P1 PS4 PRESSURE
REGULATOR SWITCH
CPAP SOL
SOLENOID 4 DP
COMPRESSOR PEEP/CPAP R4 C
UNLOADING PRESSURE DAMPING AIR EXHALATION
P1 RESTRICTOR CAPACITOR P2
SOLENOID REG 3 TRANSDUCER DIFFERENTIAL VALVE
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
P2 NO
SOL8
P1 AUTOZERO SOLENOID
HEAT
EXCHANGER F6 F5
OUT IN
OUTLET INLET
FILTER OUT IN FILTER
EXHALATION CHECK VALVE
COMPARTMENT EXPIRATORY
CV5 LIMB
MC
INLET Q3/T3
SILENCER
PULSATION DAMPER COMPRESSOR EXHALATION FLOW
AND TEMPERATURE HEATED COLLECTOR
COMPRESSOR/PEDESTAL VIAL EXHALATION
SENSORS BACTERIA FILTER VALVE
COMPARTMENT (OPTIONAL) VENT
LEGEND: 2-00223
NO = Normally Open
NC = Normally Closed
C = Common (when energized, the gas
flow can be between C and NC)
Figure 2-2. Pneumatic system Diagram

(External Exhalation Valve)
2.2.1 Wall Gas Supply System

The wall gas supply system, shown in Figure 2-3, regulates and delivers air and oxygen (gas)
to the ventilator. This system also supplies two downstream systems with oxygen if the
external air supply becomes unavailable.
O2 REGULATOR
REG 1 TO ROOM AIR
O2 FILTER
F2 O2
CHECK VALVE O2 SCREEN
CV1 FILTER F11
TO FLOW
CONTROL SYTEM
CROSS-OVER SOLENOID
50 PSI O2
O2 PRESSURE
SWITCH NC C
O2 WATER PS1 AIR
TRAP AND REGULATOR
FILTER F1 REG 2 NO
AIR
FILTER AIR
CHECK VALVE AIR SCREEN
CV2 FILTER F10
TO FLOW
CONTROL SYTEM
50 PSI AIR F7
AIR
PRESSURE FROM PILOT
AIR WATER SWITCH COMPRESSOR PRESSURE
TRAP AND PS2 SYSTEM OUTLET
FILTER F3 FILTER
TO PEEP/CPAP
SYSTEMS 2-00147
Figure 2-3. Wall Gas Supply System Diagram
2.2.1.1 Component Descriptions

The wall gas supply system components, shown in Figure 2-3 and 2-4, are described below.
Oxygen and air, water traps and filters (F1 and F3). These two externally mounted
water traps contain filters that capture particles as small as 0.3 µm with 99.98%
efficiency. F1 and F3 remove water droplets in the oxygen or air line but are not
guaranteed to remove all moisture from the gas line. Water entering the pneumatic
system will eventually damage the pneumatic components. These filters are included
in all preventive maintenance kits. The water trap inlet filters are diameter and thread
indexed to prevent cross-connection after servicing.
Oxygen and air inlet filters (F2 and F4). Two filters located between the water trap
cap and base. They are capable of capturing particles as small as 20 µm. These filters
also prevent particles from entering the ventilator when F1 and F3 are replaced. The
water trap cap and base are screw hole indexed to prevent cross-connection after
servicing. They are contained in the 10,000-hour preventive maintenance kit.
Oxygen and air pressure switches (PS1 or PS2). These switches sense a loss of wall
gas supply pressure. These switches are in the closed position with gas supplied. They
open if gas pressure falls below 35 psig nominal. The switches are included as part of
the oxygen and air regulator assemblies contained in the 10,000-hour preventive
maintenance kit.
Theory of Operation B
Oxygen and air check valves (CV1 or CV2). A high-pressure unidirectional flow device, mounted
downstream of the pressure switch, which prevents ventilator backflow into the wall air or oxygen
system. The check valves are included in the 10,000-hour preventive maintenance kit.
Oxygen and air regulators and outlet screen filters (REG1 and REG2, F10 and F11). A
spring-loaded, pressure-relieving regulator. Regulators 1 and 2 maintain an output pressure of 10
psig (68.95 kPa), with an input pressure of 35 to 100 psig (241.33 to 689.50 kPa). The regulator
outlet screen filters are capable of capturing particles as small as 75 µm. These wire-mesh filters help
protect the oxygen and air flow sensors (Q1/T1 and Q2/T2) and the proportional solenoid valves
(PSOL1 and PSOL2) from debris. The regulator assemblies contained in the 10,000-hour preventive
maintenance kit includes the regulator, check valve, pressure switch and outlet screen filter.
Cross-over solenoid valve (SOL3). A +12 V, three-way solenoid valve. When de-energized, it
allows wall air or compressor air to operate the PEEP/CPAP and Safety Valve Systems. When SOL3
is energized, it supplies these two downstream systems with 100% oxygen. SOL3 energizes when
wall air and compressor air are not available, or during BUV when oxygen is connected.
Pilot pressure outlet filter (F7). Translucent plastic filter that protects the PEEP/CPAP and Safety
Valve Systems. F7 captures internally generated particles at 0.3 µm nominal size. The filter is
included in the 10,000-hour preventive maintenance kit.
2.2.1.2 System Operation

During inspiration, oxygen from an external supply enters the ventilator through filters F1
and F2. If an external source of compressed air is available, the air passes through filters F3
and F4. Gas contaminants in the wall supplies are trapped by these filters. Oxygen and air
pressure switches PS1 and PS2 continually monitor these supply lines for pressure loss.
Oxygen and air then flow through oxygen and air check valves CV1 and CV2. These check
valves prevent backflow that could contaminate the wall supply lines. Oxygen and air
regulators REG1 and REG2 reduce the supply pressures from between 35 and 100 psig to 10
psig nominal. Excess REG1 pressure is vented to a common port. Excess REG2 pressure is
vented to the atmosphere (room air) through the REG2 bleed port.
If an external source of air is available and of adequate pressure, this air passes through SOL3
and F7 into the PEEP/CPAP and safety valve systems. Should this external air supply be lost,
the compressor takes over. If the compressor pressure drops below 8 psi, the cross-over
solenoid SOL3 is energized, supplying pure oxygen to these systems. See Section 2.4.3.7 (wall
air-to-compressor switchover).
F4 F2
F3 F1
Air Oxygen
F7 Water traps
2-00224 2-00225
CV1, CV2 2-00226

PS1, PS2 2-00227
REG1, REG2 SOL3

2-00228 2-00229
Figure 2-4. Wall Gas Supply System Components
2.2.2 Motor Compressor System
The optional motor compressor system, shown in Figure 2-5, supplies air to the ventilator if
an external air source is unavailable, or if source pressure is below 35 psig (241.33 kPa)
nominal.
FROM WALL TO FLOW

GAS SUPPLY CONTROL
SYSTEM SYSTEM
VENT
SILENCER
COMPRESSOR PRESSURE
SWITCH PS3
CV4
COMPRESSOR
CHECK VALVE
COMPRESSOR
BACK
SOL PRESSURE
9 REGULATOR
COMPRESSOR
UNLOADING
SOLENOID REG 3
HEAT
EXCHANGER F6 F5
OUTLET INLET
FILTER OUT IN FILTER
MC
INLET
SILENCER
PULSATION DAMPER COMPRESSOR
COMPRESSOR/PEDESTAL
COMPARTMENT (OPTIONAL)
2-00230
Figure 2-5. Motor Compressor System Diagram

The motor compressor system components, shown in Figure 2-5 and 2-6, are described below.
Compressor inlet filter (F5). Removes dust from room air entering the compressor. It can capture
particles as small as 10 to 50 µm. This filter is included in the compressor 2,500 and 10,000-hour
preventive maintenance kits.
Inlet silencer. Acts as a muffler to reduce the sound created by the compressor. The inlet silencer is
a hollow container.
Compressor. A rotary, 4-carbon vane compressor and 1/2-hp motor assembly, mounted on a frame
and located inside the compressor pedestal. The motor compressor delivers an output of 120 lpm at
10 psi (68.95 kPa). The motor compressor assembly and shock mounts, for vibration reduction, are
included in the compressor 10,000-hour preventive maintenance kit.
Compressor outlet filter (F6). This filter captures carbon dust generated by the compressor. The
filter captures particles as small as 0.3 µm. This filter may be tested by hand; shake it and if it rattles,
it is bad and must be replaced. The filter is included in the compressor 10,000-hour preventive
maintenance kit.
Pulsation dampers. The pulsation dampers add capacitance to the compressor system. This helps to
smooth out pressure pulsations created by the motor compressor assembly. The dampers are two
coils of silicone tubing and are included in the compressor 10,000-hour preventive maintenance kit.
Heat exchanger. A coil of copper tubing that cools the gas heated by compression. The heat
exchanger and compressor cooling fan keep the air temperature at Q2/T2 from exceeding the
maximum allowable operating temperature.
Compressor unloading solenoid valve (SOL9). A +12 V, two-way solenoid valve that reduces the
start-up current created by the motor compressor assembly. When the motor compressor is started,
the solenoid is energized which vents the compressor output to atmosphere. During normal
operation, the solenoid is de-energized, thus closing the vent to atmosphere.
Compressor pressure switch (PS3). Monitors the compressor system outlet pressure and is used to
test the compressor system at startup. The normally open switch is closed when the compressor
output pressure is nominally 8 psig. When the pressure falls too low, the switch opens, an alarm is
given and the ventilator switches to the oxygen source. The switch should be calibrated as part of
every compressor preventive maintenance procedure.
Compressor back pressure regulator (REG3). Maintains a constant pressure of 10 psig throughout
the 0 to 120 lpm flow operating range by venting excess compressor output to atmosphere. The
regulator should be calibrated as part of every compressor preventive maintenance procedure.
Compressor check valve (CV4). A high-pressure, unidirectional flow device that prevents wall air
from escaping through the compressor. CV4 is identical in design and function to CV1 and CV2 (in
the wall gas supply system).
Vent silencer. Located in the ventilator cabinet, the vent silencer acts as a muffler to reduce the
sound created by REG3 as it relieves. The vent silencer vents are vented towards Q2/T2 to allow a
reduced temperature stabilization time.
2.2.2.2 System Operation (Figure 2-5)

The ventilator signals the compressor motor to start if pressure switch PS2 senses that wall air
is unavailable or pressure is insufficient (less than 35 psig or 241.33 kPa). When the
compressor starts up, SOL9 energizes to momentarily reduce the load on the compressor.
The compressor inside the ventilator compressor pedestal draws air from the atmosphere
through inlet filter F5 and through the inlet silencer to the compressor inlet. The compressed
air leaving the compressor outlet passes through outlet filter F6, which traps the carbon
material generated from the bonded carbon vanes wear. Air then passes through the
pulsation damper and the heat exchanger prior to passing through check valve CV4, which
prevents the compressed air from the wall air source from flowing back into the compressor
outlet.
The back pressure regulator REG3 adjusts the compressor output pressure to 8.75 to 10.25 psi
(60.33 to 70.67 kPa). As the compressor vanes wear and the compressor flow output drops
accordingly, the gas vented from the regulator decreases proportionately, permitting a
relatively constant pressure to be maintained in the pneumatic system.
If pressure to compressor pressure switch PS3 falls below a nominal 8 psig, the switch closes,
a low pressure inlet alarm is given, and the ventilator switches to the oxygen source.
Pulsation
Damper
Compressor
2-00231 2-00232
Heat
PS3 SOL9 Exchanger
2-00233 2-00234 2-00235
F5 REG3 F6
2-00236 2-00237 2-00238
Vent Inlet
Silencer CV4
Silencer
2-00239 2-00240 2-00241
Figure 2-6. Motor Compressor System Components
2.2.3 Flow Control System

The flow control system, shown in Figure 2-7, controls and monitors the flow of gas to the
patient.
Two proportional solenoid valves are the heart of the system. They work with two flow
sensors to mix and deliver gas through the ventilator to the patient.
TO ROOM AIR
NEBULIZER
O2 FLOW AND
TEMPERATURE P1
SENSORS ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
P2
R5
NEBULIZER P2 INLET
SOLENOID DAMPING
RESTRICTOR
PSOL 1
PROPORTIONAL TO SAFETY
SOLENOID VALVE SYSTEM
VALVE
ASSEMBLY
EXHALATION
AIR FLOW AND PSOL 2 PILOT
TEMPERATURE PRESSURE
SENSORS NETWORK
R7
CV6
NEBULIZER CV7
SOLENOID
R6 TO PEEP/CPAP
SYSTEM
FROM WALL GAS TO SAFETY
SUPPLY SYSTEM VALVE SYSTEM
OR COMPRESSOR
SYSTEM
TO PEEP/CPAP
SYSTEM 2-00148
Figure 2-7. Flow Control System Diagram

The flow control system components, shown in Figure 2-8, are described below.
Oxygen or air flow and temperature sensors (Q1/T1 or Q2/T2). Each pair of sensors comprises a
single unit that provides flow and temperature information on gas delivered by the proportional
solenoids. The oxygen and air flow sensors (Q1 and Q2) are hot film anemometers. Thermistors T1
and T2 measure the oxygen and air temperature, which is necessary for flow compensation. Each
pair of sensors comes with an EPROM that contains specific calibration data. The sensors and their
corresponding EPROM have identical serial numbers. The EPROMs are installed on the DCI-
Display Controller PCB for 80188-based units and for 8088-based units on the Memory PCB for
8088-based units.
Oxygen and air proportional solenoid valves (PSOL1 and PSOL2). Operate under
microprocessor control to deliver a precisely controlled gas flow. These valves are more like linear
motors than solenoid valves in that as current applied to the valves is increased, they open
proportionately more thus increasing the flow output. Tidal volume and waveforms are
accomplished by controlling flow over time. Rate is accomplished by the frequency of operation of
the valves. Oxygen percentages are accomplished by the flow relationships between the oxygen and
air valves. The Proportional Solenoid valve assembly consists of PSOL1, PSOL2, SOL1 and SOL2
and is replaced as a single unit if one of the PSOLs are faulty.
Oxygen or air nebulizer solenoid valve (SOL1 or SOL2). A +12 V, two way solenoid valve which,
when energized, delivers approximately 7-9 lpm at 10 psig to the nebulizer located in the patient
circuit. The solenoids energize if the Nebulizer feature is activated and only during inspiration.
SOL1 is utilized if the operator selected oxygen percentage is above 60%. SOL2 is utilized if the
operator selected oxygen percentage is equal to or below 60%. Gas flow from the nebulizer solenoids
is accounted for and compensated by the proportional solenoid valves. The Proportional Solenoid
Valve Assembly consists of PSOL1, PSOL2, SOL1 and SOL2. If one of the nebulizer solenoids is
faulty, the solenoid can be rebuilt or replaced. Caution must be taken to prevent debris from entering
the PSOL manifold when servicing either of the nebulizer solenoids.
P2 inlet damping restrictor (R5). An aluminum disc milled with a small orifice in the center. This
disc is installed in the pneumatic tubing. The restrictor (the small orifice) dampens the pressure
oscillations caused by the safety valve, that can affect P2s’ pressure measurements.
Absolute pressure transducer (P2). A differential pressure transducer with one port sealed which
permits psia measurement units instead of psig. Measurements made by P2 are used by the
microprocessor to check for patient tubing disconnections and to measure atmospheric pressure. P2
is autozeroed by measuring atmospheric pressure every minute for the first ten minutes and then
hourly. P2 is located on the Pressure Transducer PCB and is easily identified because only one of its
ports has tubing connected.
Exhalation pilot pressure network (R6, R7, CV6, CV7) (internal exhalation valve only).
Ensures that the exhalation valve stays closed during inspiration, even during moments of low flow
rates or no flow from the proportional solenoid valves. Restrictors R6 and R7 are aluminum discs
milled with small orifices that are assembled to form a pressure divider network that establishes
approximately 14-17 cmH 2O pressure. CV6 prevents this established pressure from escaping to the
patient circuit and CV7 prevents higher pressures from the PSOLs from leaking back through R7.
CV6 and CV7 work together to pass the 14-17 cmH2O pressure to the exhalation system.

Based on operator selected ventilatory parameters, the CPU opens PSOL1 and PSOL2. The
microprocessor samples Q1/T1 and Q2/T2 that make gas flow and temperature
measurements. The temperature measurements are used to correct the temperature
dependent flow measurements. Based on the data provided by Q1/T1 and Q2/T2, the CPU
adjusts PSOL1 and PSOL2 as necessary.
Mixed gas now flows from the junction of PSOL1 and PSOL2, ultimately destined for the
patient. If the nebulizer feature is active, either the oxygen solenoid (SOL1) or the air solenoid
(SOL2) is energized depending on the operator selected oxygen percentage. This pilots the
nebulizer located in the patient circuit.
The absolute pressure transducer P2, at the junction of PSOL1 and PSOL2, measures the PSOL
outlet pressure and atmospheric pressure. These pressure measurements are processed by the
CPU to calculate flow data. Based on the flow data, the CPU can detect patient tubing
disconnect occurrences.
During inspiration, the exhalation pilot pressure restrictors R6 and R7 form a pressure divider
network that maintains a minimum exhalation drive line pressure of 14 cmH2O. Check valve
CV6 prevents flow from the restrictor network from being delivered to the patient system and
CV7 prevents flow from the outlet of the PSOLs from bleeding out through R7.
Q2/T2, Q1/T1
P2 CV6, CV7
2-00242 2-00246 2-00248
Earlier version Later version
PSOL2 PSOL2
PSOL1
PSOL1
SOL2 SOL2
2-00249 2-00250
SOL1 SOL1
Proportional Valve Assembly Proportional Valve Assembly
Figure 2-8. Flow Control System Components
2.2.4 Safety Valve System
The safety valve system, shown in Figure 2-9, vents excessive ventilator pressure to the
atmosphere. It also provides a path for air from the atmosphere to be admitted to the patient
circuit in the event of an emergency.
TO MAIN FLOW
CV3 BACTERIA FILTER
SAFETY/CHECK
VALVE
FROM FLOW
CONTROL SYSTEM TO ROOM AIR
SV
OUT
IN
SOL5 SAFETY SAFETY VALVE
VALVE SOLENOID BACK PRESSURE
REGULATOR
R2 SAFETY VALVE
PILOT RESTRICTOR
SAFETY VALVE REG 4 TO
PILOT RESTRICTOR ROOM AIR
FROM FLOW
CONTROL
SYSTEM R1 2-00266
Figure 2-9. Safety Valve System Diagram

The safety valve system components, shown in Figure 2-10, are described below.
Safety valve pilot restrictors (R1 and R2). These restrictors are aluminum discs milled with small
orifices in the center of the disc. These discs are installed in the pneumatic tubing. R1, in conjunction
with REG4, establishes a pressure of 60 cmH2O, to pilot the safety valve closed. R2 is for damping
purposes only.
Safety valve back pressure regulator (REG4). A back pressure regulator that works in conjunction
with restrictor R1. The back pressure regulator works to establish a pressure of 60 cmH2O to pilot the
safety valve closed.
Safety valve pilot solenoid valve (SOL5). A +12 V, three-way solenoid valve which is energized
during normal ventilation so the 60 cmH2O pressure from R1, R2 and REG4 will close the safety
valve. To open the safety valve, SOL5 is de-energized.
Safety valve/check valve (SV/CV3) assembly. The safety valve consists of diaphragm and seating
components. During normal ventilation, the valve is closed with a 60 cmH2O pressure applied via
SOL5. In the closed position, flow delivered from PSOL1 and PSOL2 is routed to the patient circuit.
If the valve is open, any gas delivered exits to the atmosphere. The safety valve has two important
safety functions:
• First, if outlet pressure exceeds the maximum operating pressure of the patient system
(120 to 150 cmH2O for all units except German, 100 to 120 cmH2O for German units),
the safety valve passively relieves excess pressure. The actual safety valve relief pressure
may vary within a single unit, depending on the combined relief and patient flow rate.
• Second, if the microprocessor detects a catastrophic failure, the Safety Valve Open
(SVO) alarm is declared and the safety valve is opened by de-energizing SOL5. This
allows the patient to freely breathe room air.
The check valve (CV3), located in the safety valve’s manifold, prevents back flow of the
patient’s exhaled gas while the safety valve is open, preventing the patient from rebreathing
this gas.
2.2.4.2 System Operation

Should the operating pressure of the patient system exceed 120 to 150 cmH 2O due to a
system failure, the safety valve will automatically sense and relieve the excess pressure.
In case of a catastrophic ventilator failure, such as a power failure, safety valve solenoid SOL5
is de-energized, venting the pilot pressure to atmosphere. This causes the safety valve to open
and permits the patient to breathe room air.
CV3, prevents the patient from rebreathing their exhaled gases by ensuring exhalation flow
occurs only through the exhalation system.
SOL5 SV/CV3 REG4

2-00267 2-00268 2-00269
Figure 2-10. Safety Valve System Components
2.2.5 Patient System
The patient system, shown in Figure 2-11, includes those “external” components that deliver
gas from the ventilator to the patient, control patient ventilation, and isolate the ventilator
from the patient with bacterial-level filters. The patient system also heats and humidifies
delivered gas if a humidifier is installed.
Puritan Bennett offers two categories of reusable patient systems for use on the 7200 Series:
the simplified and the conventional. The simplified patient system is used on ventilators with
internal exhalation valves, while the conventional patient system is used on ventilators with
external exhalation valves. The simplified patient system components include the main flow
bacteria filter, the collector vial, and optionally, the humidifier, water traps, and a nebulizer.
The conventional patient system includes all of these components plus a patient pressure
filter (F9), a patient pressure water trap, and an exhalation valve. Collector vials in the
conventional and simplified patient systems differ physically, but not functionally.

The patient system components are described below and shown in Figure 2-13. For
information on the various simplified and conventional tubing circuits offered by Puritan
Bennett, consult the product catalog.
Main flow bacteria filter. Helps protect the patient from contamination by the gas supplies, and
helps protect the ventilator from contamination by the patient system. The main flow bacteria filter
captures particles as small as 0.3 µm at a flow of 100 lpm with 99.97% efficiency.
Collector vial. Collects moisture in the exhaled gas to help keep water out of the exhalation system,
in particular the exhalation bacteria filter.
Patient pressure bacteria filter (F9) (conventional patient system only) or nebulizer bacteria
filter. Helps minimize contamination of the ventilator by the patient system. It filters 0.3 µm
nominal particles at a flow of 10 lpm with 99.97% efficiency.
Patient pressure water trap (conventional patient system only). Collects moisture in the patient
pressure line to prevent if from getting into the ventilator and interfering with its proper operation.
Exhalation valve (units with external exhalation valve only). A pneumatically actuated valve that
closes during inspiration to prevent delivered gas from venting to atmosphere. During exhalation, it
opens sufficiently to permit exhalation, while maintaining the operator-selected PEEP.
NEBULIZER
BACTERIA
FILTER
FROM FLOW
CONTROL
SYSTEM
NEBULIZER
FROM SAFETY
VALVE SYSTEM
MAIN FLOW INSPIRATORY

BACTERIA LIMB
FILTER
NEBULIZER
HUMIDIFIER
PATIENT
EXPIRATORY
TO/FROM LIMB
EXHALATION
SYSTEM
COLLECTOR
VIAL
2-00270
Simplified Patient System (Internal Exhalation Valve)
Figure 2-11. Patient System Diagram (Sheet 1 of 2)
NEBULIZER
BACTERIA FILTER
FROM FLOW
CONTROL
SYSTEM
NEBULIZER
FROM SAFETY
VALVE SYSTEM
MAIN FLOW
BACTERIA
FILTER INSPIRATORY
LIMB
NEBULIZER
HUMIDIFIER
F9
PATIENT
PRESSURE
FILTER
FROM FLOW
CONTROL
SYSTEM PATIENT
PATIENT
PRESSURE
PATIENT
PRESSURE
WATER TRAP
EXHALATION
VALVE
FROM
PEEP/CPAP
SYSTEM EXPIRATORY
LIMB
TO/FROM
EXHALATION
SYSTEM
COLLECTOR EXHALATION
VIAL VALVE 2-00271
Conventional Patient System (External Exhalation Valve)
Figure 2-12. Patient System Diagram (Sheet 2 of 2)
Patient Pressure
Collector Vial Collector Vial Water Trap
2-00272 2-00273 2-00274
Patient Pressure
Bacteria Filter F9 or Main Flow
Nebulizer Bacteria Filter External Exhalation Valve Bacteria Filter
2-00275 2-00276 2-00277
Figure 2-13. Patient System Components
2.2.6 Exhalation System
The exhalation system, shown in Figure 2-14, filters and monitors the flow of the patient’s
exhaled gas. The exhalation valve is part of the exhalation system in ventilators with an
internal exhalation valve. In ventilators with an external exhalation valve, the exhalation
valve is part of the patient system.

The exhalation system components, shown in Figure 2-15, are described below.
Bacteria filter heater. The temperature of exhaled gas is approximately 27oC as it enters the
exhalation compartment. The bacteria filter heater raises the temperature of the exhaled gases as it
passes through the exhalation bacteria filter on its way to exhalation flow and temperature sensors
Q3/T3. Heating the gas prevents moisture from condensing in the filter element and Q3/T3. The exit
gas temperature is approximately 4.4 to 5.6 °C (39.92 to 50 °F) above the temperature at the filter
inlet. The heater housing also contains a fuse that provides over-current protection.
Caution
Do not use heated wire circuits in the expiratory limb of the patient circuit. This can cause
condensation in the exhalation compartment and may damage the flow sensor.
TO/FROM TO FLOW
PEEP/CPAP CONTROL
SYSTEM SYSTEM

VALVE CV5 TO/FROM
Q3/T3 PATIENT
SYSTEM
EXHALATION FLOW
AND TEMPERATURE HEATED
EXHALATION SENSORS BACTERIA FILTER
COMPARTMENT
TO ROOM AIR
a. Internal Exhalation Valve

COMPARTMENT CV5 TO/FROM
Q3/T3 PATIENT
SYSTEM
EXHALATION FLOW
AND TEMPERATURE HEATED
SENSORS BACTERIA FILTER
VENT
2-00251
TO ROOM AIR
b. External Exhalation Valve
Figure 2-14. Exhalation System Diagram
Exhalation bacteria filter. This filter captures bacteria to minimize bacteria in the patient’s exhaled
gas from being vented to the room air which reduces cross-contamination of the ventilator. The
exhalation bacteria filter captures particles as small as 0.3 µm at a flow of 100 lpm with 99.97%
efficiency. A heating element surrounding the filter raises the temperature of exhaled gases above the
dewpoint to prevent condensation and corrosion of Q3 and the components in the exhalation system.
Exhalation check valve (CV5). A one-way device that prevents room air from entering through the
exhalation system. CV5 works with CV3 in the Safety Valve System to prevent the patient from
rebreathing their exhaled gases during a safety valve open (SVO) condition. There are four different
versions of the exhalation check valve, one for each of the four different configurations of the front
and bottom loading exhalation compartments and internal and exhalation valves.
Exhalation flow and temperature sensors (Q3/T3). A pair of sensors comprising a single unit that
provide flow and temperature information on a patient’s exhaled gas. Q3, a hot-film anemometer
flow sensor, measures exhaled gas flows in the range 1 to 200 lpm. T3 is a thermistor that measures
the temperature of the exhaled gas and provides it to the CPU. The CPU processes these two
readings, correcting for the temperature of the measured flow. Q3/T3 comes with a matched EPROM
for installation on 80188-based ventilators equipped to use with a 7250 metabolic monitor.
Exhalation valve (internal exhalation valve option only). A pneumatically actuated valve that
closes during inspiration to prevent delivered gas from venting to atmosphere. During exhalation, it
opens sufficiently to maintain the operator-selected PEEP. The exhalation valve is piloted by the
exhalation pilot control solenoid valve, SOL4. There are two different exhalation valves, one for the
current bottom loading exhalation system and one for the earlier front loading exhalation
compartment system. Do not disassemble or attempt to repair the exhalation valve.

During inspiration, the exhalation valve will be piloted closed by the Exhalation Pilot
Control Network (for internal exhalation valves only) and the pressure created by the
delivered flow from the PSOLs. This allows all delivered flow to be directed to the patient. The
CPU monitors Q3/T3 during inspiration to check for exhalation valve leaks.
During exhalation, the exhalation valve is opened allowing the patient to exhale into the
exhalation system. The exhaled gas first reaches the heated exhalation bacteria filter which
captures bacteria and heats the gas to prevent condensation on the exhalation components
to follow. Passing through the exhalation check valve CV5, the gas continues to the
exhalation flow sensor Q3/T3. The CPU monitors the flow and temperature measurements
made by Q3/T3 and uses the data for calculating the exhaled tidal volume. From Q3/T3, the
exhaled gas travels to the exhalation valve (for internal exhalation valves only) that is opened
enough to maintain operator selected PEEP/CPAP levels.
Exhalation
Bacteria Filter
2-00252
CV5 Q3/T3
2-00253 2-00254
Bacteria Exhalation Valve

Filter Heater (Internal Exhalation Valve Option)
2-00255
(Front-Loading Version) 2-00256
Figure 2-15. Exhalation System Components
2.2.7 PEEP/CPAP System

The PEEP/CPAP system is shown in Figure 2-16. This system opens the exhalation valve to
control the baseline pressure in the patient circuit. It also collects pressure data that is
processed by the CPU and for the airway pressure displays.
FROM WALL GAS TO EXHALATION

SUPPLY SYSTEM SYSTEM
TO SAFETY
VALVE SYSTEM FROM FLOW
CONTROL SYSTEM
DP
ADJUSTABLE TO ROOM AIR AUTOZERO
NO RESTRICTOR SOLENOID
R3 SOL6
IN OUT IN OUT
JV JET VENTURI F8 DAMPING DIFFERENTIAL
SOL7 PEEP/CPAP RESTRICTOR PRESSURE
FILTER EXHALATION
PEEP/ REGULATOR PILOT TRANSDUCER
CPAP BUV
CONTROL P1 PRESSURE
SOLENOID SOLENOID NC
SWITCH
R4
PEEP/CPAP DAMPING C P2
PRESSURE P1 AIR
RESTRICTOR CAPACITOR
TRANSDUCER
P2 NO SOL8
P1 AUTOZERO
SOLENOID TO/FROM
TO ROOM EXHALATION
AIR SYSTEM 2-00149
OUT IN
Figure 2-16. PEEP/CPAP System Diagram

The PEEP/CPAP system components, shown in Figure 2-17, are described below.
PEEP/CPAP solenoid valve (SOL7). A +12 V, three-way valve that is normally energized to
continually supply gas to REG5. The normally open port on the solenoid is plugged and not used.
SOL7 is electrically in parallel with SOL5 in the safety valve system. If a SVO condition is present,
both the safety valve and the exhalation valve are open allowing the patient to freely breathe room
air.
PEEP/CPAP regulator (REG5). An operator adjustable pressure regulator used to set the PEEP/
CPAP proportional pressure. This proportional pressure maintains PEEP in the circuit. The inlet
pressure to REG5 is 10 psig (68.95 kPa) nominal. The outlet pressure ranges from 0 to 52 cmH2O.
Adjustable restrictor (R3). An adjustable needle valve which is used to calibrate maximum PEEP/
CPAP proportional pressure to 41 cmH2O.
Jet venturi (JV). A pressure regulating device that together with REG5 and R3, permits the operator
to adjust and establish the PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure over the range of 0 to 41 cmH2O. The
JV maintains a steady PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure throughout each breath cycle. As the
exhalation valve opens, the jet venturi vents excess pressure. When the exhalation valve closes, the
jet venturi preserves pressure. The action of the jet venturi is partially a safety measure. If it fails,
pressure would diminish and not increase when needed.
Damping restrictor bacteria filter (F8). Helps remove debris that could plug the damping restrictor
orifices. F8 captures internally generated particles of 0.3 µm nominal size. This filter is included in
the 10,000 hour preventive maintenance kit.
Damping restrictor (R4). An aluminum disc with a small orifice in the center, that is placed in the
pneumatic line between F8 and the air capacitor. R4, works in concert with the air capacitor to
smooth pressure variances that result from SOL4 actuation. This part is included in the 10,000 hour
preventive maintenance kit.
Air capacitor. A hollow cylinder, which functions as a pressure dampener. Along with R4, it helps
stabilize pressure fluctuations caused by SOL4 actuation. The air capacitor is included in the 10,000
hour preventive maintenance kit.
Exhalation pilot control solenoid valve (SOL4). This valve is at the crossroads of the Flow
Control, PEEP/CPAP and Exhalation Systems. It is a +12 V, three-way valve that selects the
pneumatic piloting pressure for the exhalation valve, during inspiration and exhalation. SOL4 is
energized during inspiration, therefore, the exhalation valve is piloted by either the exhalation pilot
control network, R6, R7, CV6 and CV7, or from the PSOLs. During exhalation, SOL4 is de-
energized, thus applying PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure to the exhalation valve. SOL4 is
included in the ventilator 10,000 hour preventive maintenance kit.
PEEP/CPAP pressure transducer (P1). A differential pressure transducer that measures the
difference between PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure and the atmosphere. P1 is autozeroed every
minute for the first 10 minutes of ventilator operation and then hourly. P1 is located on the Pressure
Transducer PCB. It can be identified because on this transducer, only port 2 has a tubing connector.
P1 autozero solenoid valve (SOL8). A +6 V, three-way valve, which, when periodically activated,
allows the PEEP/CPAP pressure transducer P1 to be autozeroed by venting to atmosphere (room air).
SOL8 is supplied with +12 V for rapid actuation.
Differential Pressure Transducer (DP). A differential pressure transducer that measures the
difference between the patient circuit pressure and PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure. DP is
autozeroed every minute for the first 10 minutes of ventilator operation and then hourly. DP is
located on the Pressure Transducer PCB and is easily identified by noting that both port 1 and port 2
have tubing connected.
DP Autozero Solenoid Valve (SOL6). A +6 V, three way solenoid valve energized once a minute
for the first ten minutes and then hourly to autozero pressure transducer DP. SOL6 is supplied with
+12 V for rapid actuation.
BUV High Pressure Limit Switch (PS4). A differential pressure switch that limits pressure in the
patient circuit to 30 cmH2O above PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure during a Back Up Ventilator
(BUV) condition. PS4 is not monitored during normal operation.

The PEEP/CPAP solenoid valve SOL7 supplies 10 psig to REG5. An operator adjusted pressure
from Reg5 drives adjustable restrictor R3 and the jet venturi creating PEEP/CPAP proportional
pressure. The proportional pressure passes through the R4 resistor and air capacitor (R4&AC)
pressure damping network. A de-energized SOL4 passes the PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure
to the exhalation valve. Because the exhalation valve has a area ratio of approximately 1:1.4,
PEEP in the patient circuit is approximately 1.4 times PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure.
PEEP/CPAP pressure transducer P1 monitors the difference between PEEP/CPAP proportional
pressure and atmospheric pressure. Pressure transducer DP monitors the difference between
patient circuit pressure and PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure. Using the following formula,
the results of these two transducers produces the LED bar graph or analog meter displays.
LED bar graph or analog meter display is created by the sum of P1 and DP:
(DPP2 - DPP1) + (P1P2 - P1P1)
During Extended Self Test (EST), the Area Ratio test measures and records into memory the
current exhalation valve area ratio. This value is then multiplied by P1’s reading.
Digital PEEP/CPAP display is the product of P1 and the exhalation valve area ratio in battery
backed RAM:
(P1P2 - P1P1) x Area Ratio in BBR
Autozeroing of the pressure transducers checks for proper operation and corrects for any
drifting that may occur. The autozero task is performed once a minute for the first ten
minutes of operation, then, once an hour after that. The first autozero occurs when Power On
Self Test (POST) has successfully completed. The autozero task is performed at the end of
exhalation so it does not interrupt a regular breathing pattern.
P1 is autozeroed by energizing SOL8. In doing so, the PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure
applied to port 2 is vented to atmosphere. Since port 1 is already open to atmosphere, the
CPU can sample the transducer at this time.
DP is autozeroed by energizing SOL6. In doing so, the patient circuit pressure applied to port
2 is vented to PEEP/CPAP proportional pressure. Since port 1 is already at PEEP/CPAP
proportional pressure, the CPU can sample the transducer at this time.
P1 JV DP
2-00258 2-00257 2-00242
F8 R3 PS4
2-00259 2-00260 2-00245
REG5 Air Capacitor SOL4

2-00261 2-00262 2-00263
SOL6 SOL7 SOL8

2-00243 2-00264 2-00265
Figure 2-17. PEEP/CPAP System Components
2.3 Electrical System

This subsection describes the operation of the 7200 Series Ventilator electrical system. It
begins by briefly describing the overall ventilator electrical operation. It continues by
describing the major electrical units at length. Table 2-2 lists the major electrical units and
briefly describes their major functions.
Negative-true signals (active at 0 V) are denoted by a slash (/) following the signal mnemonic.
Signal mnemonics without a slash are assumed to be positive-true (normally active at +5 V).
Table 2-2: Electrical Units and Their Functions
Electrical Unit Function
Power supply • +5, +12, and ±15 V supply

• Low ac voltage detection
• Line voltage surge suppressor (later 100/115 V units, intermediate 220/24V units)
• Isolation transformer (220/240 V EMI units)
Utility panel • Includes power switch, power relay, circuit breaker, RFI line filter, power voltage line filter,
elapsed time meter (ETM), and batteries
Motherboard • Multibus
• Interconnects pneumatics, utility panel, power supply, and interface PCB
Pressure transducer PCB • Pressure transducers P1, P2, and DP

• +10 V converter for transducers
80188 CPU PCB • Primary system control

• Primary clock, system clock, and bus clock generation
• POST control and LEDs
• Watchdog timer
• Interface between conversion PCB and CPU
• Software storage
• Battery-backed RAM (storage of ventilator settings and error codes)
8088 CPU PCB • Primary system control

• Primary system timing
• POST control and LEDs
• SPST interface
• Watchdog timer
• Interface between conversion PCB and CPU
Memory PCB • Software storage (except POST)

(8088-based units only) • Secondary timing
• RS-232 communications interface (for DCI and other applications, like printer, 7202
Display, and computer)
• Communications DIP switches
• Option PAL
• Time of day and date
• Lookup tables for air and oxygen flow sensors
• Battery-backed RAM (storage of ventilator settings, error codes)
• Temporary data storage
Pulse oximetry PCB • Measures arterial oxygen saturation and pulse rate for display
assembly (Multibus and • Separate speaker and circuit
Biox PCBs)
Table 2-2: Electrical Units and Their Functions (continued)
Electrical Unit Function
DCI-display controller PCB • System control of keyboard and display functions (interface between CPU and keyboard/
(80188-based units only display)
• RS-232 communications interface (for DCI and other applications like printer, 7202
Display, and computer)
• Communications DIP switches
• Resets ventilator after watchdog time-out or power fail
• Option PAL
• Time of day and date
• Lookup tables for air and oxygen flow sensors
Display controller PCB • System control of all keyboard and display functions (interface between CPU and actual
(8088-based units only) keyboard/display)
• Resets ventilator after watchdog time-out or power fail
Front panel display PCB • Contains VFDs and LEDs

• Display and lamp drivers
• Generates characters for display
• Voltage converters for VFDs
Conversion PCB • All A/D and D/A conversion (sensors, proportional solenoid valves)
• Audio alarm control
• BUV control circuit
• +10 V converter for T1, T2, and T3
Interface PCB • Back-up ventilator

• Nurse’s call relay
• Flow sensor (Q1, Q2, and Q3) and temperature sensor (T1, T2, and T3) output
conditioning
• Proportional solenoid valve interface
• Solenoid signal gating and conditioning
• Pressure transducer (P1, P2, and DP) and thermistor (T1, T2, and T3) multiplexing
• BUV and safety valve open lamp drivers
• Battery charger
• Conditions analog output connector FLOW and PRESSURE signals
• Compressor control circuitry
• Feeds through EST switch activating signal
• Feeds through analog meter activating signal
• Feeds through display control signals
2.3.1 Overview
Control of the ventilator pneumatics is performed by the electrical system, shown in the
ventilator wiring diagram, which is located in the front pocket of this manual.
Power distribution. As the wiring diagram shows, the ventilator is powered by ac power, which is
routed to the power supply via the utility panel. The power supply converts the ac power to dc
voltages necessary to power the digital electronics, the electro-pneumatic components, and the
displays. These dc voltages are distributed to the motherboard, from where it is routed throughout the
ventilator system.
Microprocessor control. At the “heart” of the electrical system is the central processing unit (CPU),
located on the CPU PCB. The various pneumatic and electrical functional units interact as directed
by the CPU and under control of programs stored in memory.
Inputs to the CPU come from the following:
• Sense inputs from the electro-pneumatic components, such as pressure switches and
flow and pressure transducer inputs.
• Operator keyboard inputs.
Using this information, the CPU makes decisions regarding flow, pressure, and volume of air and
oxygen to be delivered to the patient. It controls these parameters by outputting data to such electro-
pneumatic components as the solenoid valves and the proportional solenoid valves. In addition, the
CPU interacts with the operator by displaying messages and other data, and by sounding the alarm.
Multibus. The CPU and the other ventilator logic interact using the system data, address, and control
buses (the Multibus), located on the motherboard. The address bus is a 20-bit bus that the CPU uses
to select a memory location or I/O device for data transfer. Data that is transferred between the CPU
and a memory location or I/O device is passed over the 8-bit bi-directional data bus. The direction of
data transfer (input or output with reference to the CPU) is specified by various control signals that
originate in the CPU and are distributed to memory and device control logic via the control bus. The
memory and device control logic in turn sends various control signals back to the CPU to verify
completion. Examples of these control signals are interrupt request (IRQ), memory write command
(MWTC), processor clock (CLK), and Multibus acknowledge (MBXACK).
Display and keyboard interface. The CPU does not interface directly with the ventilator keyboard,
displays, and pneumatics; instead, it interfaces with control logic for those devices. Data to be
displayed is sent to the DCI-display controller PCB (in 80188-based units) or the display controller
PCB (in 8088-based units) via the Multibus. That PCB sends the data to the displays, located on the
front panel display PCB.
The keyboard interfaces with the CPU by sending it an interrupt request when a key is pressed. In
response, the CPU reads a buffer in the keyboard logic to determine which key was pressed.
Pneumatic interface. Analog sense data coming from the pneumatics is sent via the motherboard
PCB to the interface PCB, where it is conditioned. This conditioned analog data is in turn sent to the
conversion PCB, where it is converted into digital signals usable by the CPU. Similarly, digital
control signals for the pneumatics are passed from the CPU to the conversion PCB, where they are
converted into analog signals. These analog signals are conditioned and multiplexed on the interface
PCB, then the output is sent to the pneumatics via the motherboard PCB.
2.3.2 The ac Power Distribution: Utility Panel
The utility panel distributes ac power to the dc power supplies and other ventilator
components (Figure 2-18). The utility panel includes the on/off power switch, power relay,
circuit breaker, RFI line filter, surge-suppression varistor, the elapsed time meter (ETM), and
the internal line voltage filter (surge suppressor) (in later-model 220/240 V units). The
batteries, discussed in Section 2.3.3, also are part of the utility panel. The ac power switch
applies current to the power relay coil, which closes the relay contacts, applying power to the
circuit breaker, RFI line filter, varistor, ETM, and humidifier. The ac power is then distributed
to the cooling fan, dc power supplies, and the exhalation compartment.
The compressor is supplied with ac directly from the utility panel terminal block. The
compressor compartment includes its own circuit breaker and line filter for the ac. The
compressor motor is energized only if the compressor-ETM start relay in the compressor
compartment is energized. This relay is hard-wired to pressure switch PS2 in the wall gas
supply line. If PS2 drops out, the compressor-ETM relay closes and ac is applied to the
compressor motor.
UTILITY PANEL
COMPRESSOR COMPARTMENT
AC SURGE SUPPRESSOR • LINE FILTER
POWER (LATER 220/240 V UNITS • CIRCUIT BREAKER
INPUT ONLY) • ETM/MC START RELAY
• ELAPSED TIME METER
• COMPRESSOR
• FAN(S)
EXHALATION COMPARTMENT
• LINE FILTER (ALL BUT • HUMIDIFIER

LATER 220/240 V UNITS) • FILTER HEATER
• CIRCUIT BREAKER
• POWER RELAY ELECTRONICS COMPARTMENT
• ON-OFF SWITCH
• ELAPSED TIME METER COOLING FAN
DC POWER SUPPLY
• +5 V
SURGE SUPPRESSOR
(LATER 100/115 V UNITS • +12 V
AND INTERMEDIATE • ±15 V
220/240 V UNITS) • POWER FAIL MODULE
• ISOLATION TRANSFORMER
2-00278
Figure 2-18. ac Power Distribution
2.3.3 The dc Power Supply and Distribution: Power Supplies and Batteries
The dc power for continuous ventilator operation is provided by a power supply
(Figure 2-19). The power supply is made up of three separate supplies (+5, +12, and ±15 V), a
power fail module to detect low ac, and an isolation transformer to step the ac voltage to the
PFM (for 220/240 V EMI power supply). Additionally, batteries provide dc power to protect
ventilator data and to activate the audio alarm if power is lost. Battery power distribution is
shown in Figure 2-19.
In addition, a +5 V to +12 V converter on the DCI-display controller or memory PCB provides
voltages for RS-232 transmission. A voltage converter on the front panel display PCB also
converts +5 V to +50 V, 1.7 V ac, and 5.6 V ac to power the vacuum fluorescent displays. Two
+15 V to +10 V converters on the conversion PCB and the pressure transducer PCB provide
voltages for the pressure and temperature transducers.
Figure 2-20 through Figure 2-23 show how +5 V, +10 V, +12 V, and ±15 V are distributed to the
ventilator.
2.3.3.1 +5 V, +12 V, and ±15 V Supplies

Each power supply module includes circuits for remote sensing to compensate for voltage
losses in the dc supply harness and fluctuations in PCB loads. Other built-in circuits include
over-voltage protection (crowbar circuits), and short circuit and overload protection.
2-00279
Figure 2-19. Power Supply
8088-10
Figure 2-20. +5 V Power Distribution
8088-12
8088
8088-11
Figure 2-23. ±15 V Power Distribution
2.3.3.2 Power Fail Module

The power fail module detects the loss of ac input power to the ventilator. This loss or
removal of ac power may be due to a momentary power interruption, turning off power at
the utility panel, or to a complete, long term loss of ac power at the source. When ac power is
lost, the power fail module causes an interrupt to the CPU, starting a power down software
sequence. For further information on the operation of the ventilator during a power fail
condition, see Section 2.4.3.
2.3.3.3 Isolation Transformer

The isolation transformer is used on 220 V and 240 V EMI power supplies. The isolation
transformer steps the ac voltage going to the power fail module from 220 V and 240 V
to 115 V.
2.3.3.4 Batteries
Two 2 V lead-acid batteries in the utility panel protect RAM contents when power is removed
from the ventilator. These batteries also permit the alarm to sound when power is lost. The
batteries do not provide power to operate the ventilator in the event of a power failure.
Figure 2-24 shows battery power distribution.
BATTERY
Figure 2-24. Battery Power Distribution
2.3.4 CPU, Memory, and Associated Circuits: MegaCPU PCB or

80188 CPU PCB
The megaCPU PCB or 80188 CPU PCB (Figure 2-25) contains the microprocessor, most of the
ventilator memory, including software storage, and much of the ventilator control circuitry.
The megaCPU PCB is used in current 7200 Series Ventilators. The 80188 version of the CPU
PCB is used in intermediate 7200 Series Ventilators. These ventilators use the Intel 80188
Microprocessor. The two PCBs differ primarily in that the megaCPU PCB contains more
memory, which is necessary when running certain ventilator operations.
The PCB makes use of a “kernel” concept for test purposes. The CPU, memory, and the
minimum additional logic the CPU requires for operation are structured into this kernel.
Unidirectional bus drivers permit the kernel to be isolated from the rest of the PCB. When the
kernel is operational and isolated from the rest of the system, it can run POST and report
results to the error code LEDs.
The functional units of the megaCPU PCB or 80188 CPU PCB (called the “CPU PCB” for
short) are described briefly below.
Multibus interface. Buffers Multibus address, data, and control signals. The BUSY/ signal is tied
low to indicate to the bus that the CPU PCB is always the bus master.
Local bus interface and decode logic. Controls the passage of data, address, and control signals
between the CPU and memory or I/O devices on the CPU PCB. It also produces select signals for
devices on the CPU PCB. The local bus interface and decoder includes latches for addresses and
LED data, one data transceiver, one control buffer, and various decoding gates.
Eight LEDs. Display POST error information.
Kernel EPROM (64 KB). Contains instructions for POST and for initialization of the
microprocessor’s integral functions.
Non-maskable interrupt (NMI) circuit. Signals the CPU when either a bus time-out (BTO) has
occurred (an accessed address is not responding) or ac power is lost (PWRFAIL). The power failure
is sensed by the power supply’s power fail module. The PWRFAIL signal is latched in the non-
maskable interrupt (NMI) generator.
Intel 80188 Microprocessor (CPU). The ventilator’s central processing unit. This microprocessor
chip contains internal timers, a clock generator, memory and device decode logic, and an interrupt
controller. One of the internal timers is used for the bus time-out function. Another functions as the
20 ms system clock used by the software. Attached to the 80188 Microprocessor is a 20 MHz crystal,
whose output is divided by two for internal timing and to supply a 10 MHz clock output. The10 MHz
clock signal provides the basis for the two Multibus bus clock signals, BCLK and CCLK. The
microprocessor. outputs memory and peripheral select signals, MCS0/, MCS2/, UCS/, PCS0/, and
PCS3/ through PCS6/.Interrupt controlling circuitry within the microprocessor chip handles
interrupts according to the priorities programmed.
RAM (128 KB). CMOS static RAM devices powered by the +5 V supply (or batteries when power
is lost). Because CMOS RAM consumes little power, a battery can preserve this data for long periods
should power be lost. To safeguard data during power on and off, RAM cannot be accessed while
supply voltages are stabilizing (INIT/ active).
System-shared EPROM (512 KB). Stores ventilator systems and applications programs.
Memory decode logic. Selectively enables portions of system-shared EPROM and RAM.
5 MHz clock. Divides the 10MHz clock output by the CPU to produce LCLK.
Local bus expansion interface. Permits interface with an external device such as the System
Performance Service Tester (SPST), a Puritan Bennett proprietary tester. The interface includes
address and control buffer and a data transceiver.
Ready generator. Provides the CPU with an acknowledge signal from an addressed memory or I/O
device.
Digital I/O interface. Provides I/O ports for transmitting data between the CPU and the conversion
PCB.
Watchdog timer. Strobed by the software periodically to prevent its timing out. When the timer
does time out, indicating a software or hardware problem, the system is reset.
18570
Figure 2-25. 80188 CPU PCB Block Diagram
2.3.5 CPU and Associated Circuits: 8088 CPU PCB

The 8088 CPU PCB (Figure 2-26) contains the microprocessor, some memory, I/O ports,
interrupt and other associated control circuitry, and circuitry to interface the ventilator to
external test equipment. The 8088 version of the CPU PCB is used in earlier 7200
Series Ventilators. These ventilators use the Intel 8088 Microprocessor.
The CPU PCB makes use of a “kernel” concept for test purposes. The CPU, memory, I/O ports,
and the minimum additional logic the CPU requires for operation are structured into this
kernel. Unidirectional bus drivers permit the kernel to be isolated from the rest of the PCB.
When the kernel is operational and isolated from the rest of the system, it can run POST and
report results to the error code LEDs.
The functional units of the 8088 CPU PCB are described briefly below.
Multibus interface. Buffers Multibus address, data, and control signals. Performs bus arbitration
functions for the Multibus. Because there may be more than one PCB requiring access to the
Multibus, the Multibus interface logic resolves priority between bus masters.
Local bus interface and decode logic. Controls the passage of data, address, and control signals
between the CPU and memory or I/O devices on the CPU PCB.
EPROM-I/O. Stores POST instructions and contains I/O ports to communicate self-test data.
Three LEDs. Display POST error information.
Ready generator. Provides the CPU with an acknowledge signal from an addressed memory or I/O
device.
Bus controller. Produces memory and I/O control signals by decoding status signals S0/ through S2/
from the CPU. Among the signals generated are various read and write commands, as well as the
address latch enable (ALE) signal.
Intel 8088 Microprocessor (CPU). The ventilator’s central processing unit. This microprocessor
chip receives or transmits 8-bit data over multiplexed data/address lines KADR00 through KADR07.
The CPU addresses up to one million bytes of memory over KADR00 through KADR07 and 12
additional address lines KADR08 through KADR13. The CPU controls operation of the ventilator
via the read (RD/) line and status lines S0/ through S2/; these status lines are decoded in the bus
controller and used to generate memory and I/O control signals. Status and other information is input
to the CPU over interrupt request (INTR), non-maskable interrupt (NMI), and I/O acknowledge
(READY) lines.
Clock generator. Generates a master clock which is divided to produce a 5 MHz clock used by
CPU, the bus controller, and the Multibus interface; and a 2.5 MHz clock used by the EPROM-I/O
and the timing section.
Timing section (watchdog timer, bus timer, etc.). Provides system timing function and hardware
operation monitoring. It provides the foreground clock used by the software and the software
watchdog timer function. A bus timer also determines the presence of bus activity.
EPROM (up to 24 KB). Stores POST and other ventilator software.
Digital I/O interface. Provides two Intel 8255 I/O ports for transmitting data between the CPU and
the conversion PCB.
Static RAM (8 KB). Stores ventilator data.
Interrupt controller. Provides the CPU with prioritized interrupt inputs and generates other
interrupt information. Interrupts are caused by peripherals requiring service, by a bus time-out, a
watchdog time-out, or a power failure.
Local bus expansion interface. Drives the local address, data, and control bus during transmission
between the CPU PCB and the System Performance Service Tester (SPST), a Puritan Bennett
proprietary tester.
8088-24
Figure 2-26. 8088 CPU PCB Block Diagram
2.3.6 Memory: Memory PCB (8088-Based Ventilators Only)

The memory PCB (Figure 2-27) provides data storage for the ventilator and permits
communications with the 7202 Display, a printer, or a computer over two RS-232 and RS-422
ports. The memory PCB is used in earlier 7200 Series Ventilators, those ventilators that use an
Intel 8088 Microprocessor.
The functional units of the memory PCB are described briefly below.
Multibus interface. Controls data transfer between the Multibus and the memory PCB internal bus.
System-shared RAM. Temporarily stores data used by the ventilator.
System-shared EPROM. Stores ventilator systems and applications programs.
Battery-backed RAM. A low-power memory device that stores vital data such as ventilator settings
and Extended Self-Test (EST) error codes. Battery-backed RAM consists of low-power CMOS static
RAM devices. Therefore, a battery can preserve this data for long periods should power be lost. A
safeguard prevents battery-backed RAM from being accessed while supply voltages are stabilizing.
Transducer lookup tables (EPROMs). Store data unique to specific oxygen and air flow sensors,
Q1 and Q2. This data is used by the microprocessor to linearize the output of these two sensors.
These two EPROM devices plug into soldered sockets. EPROM U302 contains the lookup table for
Q1, and EPROM U403 contains the lookup table for Q2. See Section 15 for locations of U302 and
U403.
RS-232 and RS-422 drivers and receivers. Buffer data being sent between the ventilator and
communications devices. They convert serial data sent by the SCC from TTL voltage levels of 0 V
to +5 V to RS-232 voltage levels of -3 to -25 V (low) and +3 to +25 V (high), and vice versa. To
supply voltages of this level, RS-232 drivers require inputs of +12 and -12 V, which are supplied by
the +5 V to ±12 V converter.
Serial Communications Controller (SCC). Converts parallel data into a serial data stream for
transmission to such serial devices as printers and intelligent terminals. It converts serial data
received from these devices into 8-bit parallel data that the CPU can use. The SCC has two ports,
each programmable independently of the other. When the DCI communications facility is enabled,
the SCC ports can operate as two RS-232 ports, or one RS-232 and one RS-422 port.
The SCC can be programmed for communications at various baud rates, in synchronous or
asynchronous modes, in various start/stop bit configurations, and with various error-correcting
schemes. The configuration switches on the DCI provide programming inputs to the SCC. (See
Figure 2-28 for details of these operator-selected parameters.)
Real-time clock. Keeps track of the time of day and date for use in printed reports and error code
time/date stamps.
Configuration switches. Three DIP switches that permit the user to configure communications
ports. The settings for these switches are shown in Figure 3-3.
Acknowledge generator. Produces a signal to inform the CPU that a data transfer on the memory
PCB was completed successfully.
Option PAL. Contains option data.
Memory and I/O select logic. Selectively enables portions of memory or I/O devices on the
memory PCB. It consists of a programmed array logic (PAL) devices, other decoding logic, and
buffers.
Clock generator and I/O timing section. Produces clock signals for use on the memory PCB and in
the rest of the ventilator.
8088-23
Figure 2-27. Memory PCB Block Diagram
2.3.7 DCI-Display Controller PCB (Used in 80188-Based Units Only)

The DCI-display controller PCB (Figure 2-28) permits communication with the 7202 Display,
a printer, or a computer over four RS-232 ports. It also interfaces the displays and keyboard
with the CPU PCB, and it provides a path for lamp, analog meter, and alarm control signals
traveling between the interface PCB and the front panel. The DCI-display controller PCB also
includes a power sequencer to detect the decay of the +5 V power supply output. The
DCI-display controller PCB is used in current 7200 Series Ventilators, those ventilators that
use an Intel 80188 Microprocessor.
The functional units of the DCI-display controller PCB are described briefly below. A
description of how various PCBs interact during keyboard and display operations is given in
Section 2.4.2.
Multibus interface. Buffers address, data, and control signals being transferred between the
Multibus and the keyboard/display system. It also generates enabling signals for devices on the PCB
and an acknowledge signal to the CPU.
Power sequencer. Generates the INIT/ signal to reset the ventilator electronics to a known state
under these conditions. It remains active until the system is turned on or ac power recovers. See
Section 2.4.3 for a complete discussion of ventilator initialization.
During a normal power down, an accidental power loss, or any other time +5 V power supply output
falls below +4.775 V or exceeds +5.225 V.
After a watchdog timeout
Real-time clock. Keeps track of the time of day and date for use in printed reports and error code
time/date stamps.
Option PAL. Contains option data.
Keyboard interface and drivers. Read keyboard input data by scanning the keyboard matrix for
pressed keys. When a key is pressed, a keyswitch is closed, allowing current to flow through the
activated row to the column where the closed keyswitch is located. The state of each of the eight
columns in the matrix is sent to the DCI-display controller PCB over keyboard return lines RL0
through RL7. The interface, which uses the Intel 8279-5 Programmable Keyboard/Display Interface,
includes a debounce circuit, which waits and rechecks a key for closure.
Transducer lookup tables (EPROMs). Store data unique to specific oxygen, air and exhalation
flow sensors, Q1, Q2, and Q3. This data is used by the microprocessor to linearize the output of these
three sensors. These three EPROM devices plug into soldered sockets. EPROM U406 contains the
lookup table for Q1, EPROM U504 contains the lookup table for Q2, and EPROM U607 contains the
lookup table for Q3.
Serial Communications Controllers (SCCs). Convert parallel data into a serial data stream for
transmission to such serial devices as printers and intelligent terminals. The SCC converts serial data
received from these devices into 8-bit parallel data that the CPU can use. The SCCs have a total of
four RS-232 ports. The SCC can be programmed for communications at various baud rates, in
synchronous or asynchronous modes, in various start/stop bit configurations, and with various
error-correcting schemes. The configuration switches on the DCI provide programming inputs to the
SCC. (See Figure 3-3 for details of these operator-selected parameters.)
Display data latches and buffers. Limit the transfer of data between RAM and the front panel to
periods of display refreshing.
RS-232 drivers and receivers. Buffer data being sent between the ventilator and communications
devices. They convert serial data from the SCCs from TTL voltage levels of 0 V to RS-232 voltage
levels of -3 to -25 V (low) and +3 to +25 V (high), and vice versa.
Fan alarm circuit. Produces a pulse that can be read by CPU to determine whether fan is revolving
at adequate speed (EMI units only).
Utility panel buffer. Permits reading of fan alarm pulse and other signals.
8088-6
Figure 2-28. DCI-Display Controller PCB Block

Diagram
Display RAM. Stores data to be displayed, including alphanumeric, numeric, LED, and lamp data.
The data for each character, single LED indicator, or alarm summary lamp/LED is accessible at a
fixed RAM address.
Address selector. Places either a memory address (A0 through A5) or a refresh address (RA0
through RA5) on the display RAM address lines, based on the state of RAMSEL/.
Refresh address circuits. Repeatedly furnishes refresh addresses to the lowest six bits of a memory
address, resulting in the continuous re-outputting of display data already on display. Display
refreshing takes place when the CPU is not addressing RAM either to write new data to it or to read
data for display.
Timing circuit. Generates clock signals used by the keyboard and display system by dividing the 10
MHz clock input. The timing circuit also generates addresses used in display refreshing.
Configuration switches (S1, S2, and S3) and buffer. Three DIP switches that permit the user to
configure communications ports. The settings for these switches are shown in Figure 3-3.
Memory and I/O select logic. Selectively enables portions of memory or I/O devices on the
DCI-display controller PCB. It consists of several programmed array logic (PAL) devices and other
decoding logic.
Acknowledge generator. Produces a signal to inform the CPU that a data transfer was completed
successfully on the DCI-display controller PCB.
2.3.8 Display Controller PCB (Used in 8088-Based Units Only)

The display controller PCB (Figure 2-29) provides direct CPU control of display and keyboard
operations. It contains RAMs to store display data, a keyboard controller LSI device, other
display and keyboard control circuitry, and a power sequencer to detect the decay of the +5 V
power supply output. In addition, the display controller provides a path for lamp, analog
meter, and alarm control signals between the interface PCB and the front panel display. The
display controller PCB is used in earlier 7200 Series Ventilators, those ventilators that use an
Intel 8088 Microprocessor.
The functional units of the display controller PCB are described briefly below. A description
of how various PCBs interact during keyboard and display operations is given in
Section 2.4.2.
Multibus interface. Buffers address, data, and control signals being transferred between the
Multibus and the keyboard/display system. It also generates enabling signals for devices in the
keyboard/display system, an acknowledge signal to the CPU, and read and write signals used by the
display controller PCB.
Display RAM. Stores data to be displayed, including alphanumeric, numeric, LED, and lamp data.
The data for each character, single LED indicator, or alarm summary lamp/LED is accessible at a
fixed RAM address.
Keyboard interface and drivers. Reads keyboard input data by scanning the keyboard matrix for
pressed keys. When a key is pressed, a keyswitch is closed, allowing current to flow through the
activated row to the column where the closed keyswitch is located. The state of each of the eight
columns in the matrix is sent to the display controller PCB over keyboard return lines RL0 through
RL7. The interface, which uses the Intel 8279-5 Programmable Keyboard/Display Interface,
includes a debounce circuit, which waits and rechecks a key for closure.
18070A
Figure 2-29. Display Controller PCB Block Diagram
Timing circuit. Generates clock signals used by the keyboard and display system by dividing the 10
MHz clock input, CCLK.
The timing circuit also generates addresses used in display refreshing. It repeatedly furnishes refresh
addresses to the lowest six bits of a memory address, resulting in the continuous re-outputting of
display data already on display. Display refreshing takes place when the CPU is not addressing RAM
either to write new data to it or to read data for display.
Power sequencer. Generates the INIT/ signal to reset the ventilator electronics to a known state
under these conditions. It remains active until the system is turned on or ac power recovers.
• During a normal power down, an accidental power loss, or any other time +5 V power
supply output falls below +4.775 V or exceeds +5.225 V.
• After a watchdog timeout (ALARM/ active)
A 25 ms timer within the power sequencer is used in conjunction with the watchdog timer on the
CPU PCB. If the watchdog timer is still timed out after 25 ms, a watchdog timeout is declared. See
Section 2.4.3 for a complete discussion of ventilator initialization.
Fan alarm circuit and buffer. Produces a pulse that can be read by CPU to determine whether fan
is revolving at adequate speed. Permits reading of that pulse (EMI units only).
Display data latches. Limit the transfer of data between RAM and the front panel to periods of
display refreshing.
Refresh address selector. Places either a memory address (A0 through A5) or a refresh address
(RA0 through RA5) on the display RAM address lines, based on the state of DISPSEL/.
2.3.9 Keyboard, Displays, and Drivers: Front Panel Display PCB

The front panel display PCB (Figure 2-30 through Figure 2-32) includes all the ventilator’s
integral display devices, such as numeric and alphanumeric vacuum fluorescent display
(VFD) panels, LED indicators, and possibly incandescent lamps. Related circuits, such as
device drivers, character generators to produce 7- and 14-segment character representations
from ASCII-coded or binary-coded decimal (BCD) characters, refresh address decoding, and a
voltage converter for the VFDs also reside on this PCB. A membrane-switch keyboard, an
analog meter (except in the Enhanced-Plus console), and an audio alarm are connected to the
front panel display PCB; these signals feed through the front panel display PCB. The keyboard
and display control logic resides on the DCI-display controller PCB or the display controller
PCB.
There are three styles of the front panel display PCB. One for the original (basic) keyboard,
one for an intermediate (enhanced) keyboard, and one for a later (Enhanced-Plus) keyboard.
The difference between the keyboards is the presence of the <AIRWAY PRESSURE> and
<EXHALED TIDAL VOLUME> keys on the basic keyboard. The Enhanced-Plus keyboard does
not have an analog gauge, like the basic and enhanced keyboards. Instead, the Enhanced-Plus
console has a digital dual-bar airway pressure display.
Changes in the appearance of two numbers, six and nine, displayed on the enhanced
keyboard are:
to
This variation occurred as a result of a change in equipment suppliers.
The functional units of the front panel display PCB are described briefly below. A description
of how various PCBs interact during keyboard and display operations is given in
Section 2.4.2.
Voltage converter. Converts +5 V from the power supply into voltage to drive the VFDs. The
voltage converter is necessary, because the VFDs require voltages not available from the ventilator
power supply. The voltage converter supplies the following voltages: +50 V dc, 1.7 V ac, and 5.6 V
ac.
Character generator PROM. Generates the 14-segment character representation for the
20-character (alphanumeric) display from output signals AN0 through AN6 and ANDP. This
character generation is accomplished in two parts. During the display blanking period (BREFCLK
active), half of the segments are generated. This segment and decimal point data is latched into a
register at the end of the blanking period. After the blanking period, the remaining segments are
generated and latched.
Timer. An astable mulitvibrator, which produces a pulse that controls the flashing of the LED
indicators and lamps.
Scan decoder. Sequentially asserts each of eight keyswitch scan lines KS0 through KS7 based on the
three-bit count supplied by the keyboard interface device on the DCI-display controller or display
controller PCB. Each output line corresponds to a row on the keyboard matrix.
Segment drivers. Amplify any of the 14 signals necessary to form the segmented 20-character
display.
Grid drivers. Enable the writing of data to a character position (one of grid signals G1 through G22,
or G1 through G32) after the appropriate segment signals (furnished by the 7-segment
decoder-driver or character generator PROM) are applied.
Seven-segment decoder-driver. Generates the 7-segment representation of alphanumeric display
data. This circuit uses the four-bit BCD and decimal point data (NUM0 through NUM3 and
NUMDP) to create each digit.
LED indicator circuits (decoder, latches, LED indicators). In the enhanced and Enhanced-Plus
front panel display PCB, two discrete LEDs comprise a single LED indicator (for example,
APNEA). In the basic front panel display PCB, one discrete LED comprises an LED indicator. The
LEDs remain lit until the LED data changes or until the appropriate data latch is disabled.
Alarm summary display circuits (latches, drivers, LEDs or lamps). In the enhanced and
Enhanced-Plus front panel display PCB, five discrete LEDs comprise an alarm summary indicator.
In the basic front panel display PCB, the alarm summary indicators are incandescent lamps. The
LEDs or lamps remain lit until the data changes or the appropriate data latch is disabled.
Keyboard. Provides pressure-sensitive membrane switches for data entry. The scan decoder
sequentially asserts each of eight keyswitch scan lines KS0 through KS7, each line corresponding to
a row on the keyboard matrix. When a key is pressed, a keyswitch is closed, allowing current to flow
through the activated row to the column where the closed keyswitch is located. The states of the
eight columns in the matrix are sent to the DCI-display controller or display-controller PCB over
keyboard return lines RL0 through RL7.
8088-30
Figure 2-30. Front Panel Display PCB Block Diagram (Enhanced-Plus)
8088-22
Figure 2-31. Front Panel Display PCB Block Diagram (Enhanced)
18090
Figure 2-32. Front Panel Display PCB Block Diagram (Basic)
2.3.10 A/D and D/A Converter: Conversion PCB
The conversion PCB (Figure 2-33) performs all digital-to-analog (D/A) and analog-to-digital
(A/D) conversion needed for ventilator operation. These converted signals are used to control
and monitor analog devices. In addition, the conversion PCB controls ventilator alarm
operation and back-up ventilator (BUV) operation. It also provides optical isolation for digital
input and output signals to and from such devices as pressure switches and solenoids.
The conversion PCB connects directly to the system Multibus and the I/O bus. High-priority,
non-interruptible information traverses the I/O bus, while other information traverses
the Multibus.
The functional units of the conversion PCB are described briefly below.
Multibus interface and address decoding section. Buffers address, data, and control signals being
transferred between the Multibus and the conversion PCB. It also generates enabling signals for
devices on the PCB.
Alarm control. Stores data used to control the audio alarm. Each of four sources can independently
activate the audio alarm upon detecting an alarm condition. The four sources are: loss of power,
apnea ventilation, BUV, and electronics compartment cooling fan (EMI only).
BUV control circuit. Permits the CPU to set and reset BUV by writing to memory addresses. The
SET/ and RESET/ signals generated by the BUV control circuit are sent to the BUV circuit on the
interface PCB. This circuit in turn generates signals to directly control the pneumatics during BUV.
See Section 2.4.3 for a complete description of BUV operation.
A/D converter and buffer. Convert analog signals to digital signals for use by the CPU. Analog
signals come from flow sensors Q1, Q2, and Q3; temperature sensors T1, T2, and T3; and pressure
transducers DP, P1, and P2. These signals pass through the interface PCB, where they are
multiplexed. The converter also generates channel select information, which is used by the
multiplexers on the interface PCB.
The A/D converter circuits include a precision instrumentation amplifier, a sample-and-hold system,
an A/D converter device, and timing and interrupt circuitry.
D/A converters (DACs 0, 1, and 3). Convert digital signals to analog signals to control the
proportional solenoid valves and the analog meter. These three 12-bit DACs, DAC0, DAC1, and
DAC3, generate 0 to 20 mA analog signals. These analog outputs represent oxygen flow (DAC0), air
flow (DAC1), and meter/test data (DAC3). For each conversion, twelve bits of input data (DAC0
through DACB) are transferred to each DAC from I/O ports on the CPU PCB.
When the ventilator is powered up, the microprocessor clears the data lines, then sets the control
lines to logic one, and resets the back-up system, driving the DACs to zero.
D/A converters (DACs 4 and 5). Convert digital signals to analog signals to control the shapes of
the pressure and flow waveforms present at the analog output connector on the utility panel. These
two DACs generate 0 to 10 V analog signals. These analog outputs represent flow waveform
(DAC4) and pressure waveform (DAC5). For each conversion, twelve bits of input data (DAC0
through DACB) are transferred to each DAC from the CPU PCB.
Input drivers/optical isolators. Buffers and optically isolates digital inputs from pressure switches
PS1, PS2, and PS3, as well as the BUV status. These inputs come from the interface PCB. Where the
transmitting and receiving circuits use different power supplies, signals are optically isolated.
CON-PCB
Figure 2-33. Conversion PCB Block Diagram
Output drivers/optical isolators. Buffers and optically isolates digital outputs to the solenoids, the
battery charger, and the compressor. Other signals buffered by the digital output interface include
INIT, RESET/, SET/, NURSE’S CALL, ALARM, and SW VBATT. These buffered signals are
output to the interface PCB. Where the transmitting and receiving circuits use different power
supplies, signals are optically isolated. Optical isolation prevents noise present on the pneumatics’
ground from interfering with the analog and digital electronics.
To ensure a clean transition between powerup and power-down, INIT/ is used to disable the digital
output’s optical isolators. To ensure a clean transition from power-down to powerup, the inputs to the
optical isolator’s drivers are inhibited by the RESET/ signal from the BUV control. This allows the
CPU time for self-checks and for initializing the I/O bus.
2.3.11 Interface PCB

The interface PCB (Figure 2-34) interconnects and conditions electronic signals transmitted
between the conversion PCB, the pneumatic components, the utility panel components, and
the DCI-display controller PCB or display controller PCB. The interface PCB also provides
battery charging and back-up ventilator (BUV) circuitry. The BUV circuitry permits the
ventilation of a patient if the CPU’s reliability is suspect.
The functional units of the interface PCB are described briefly below.
Flow sensor signal conditioning. Amplifies and filters raw inputs from flow sensors Q1, Q2, and
Q3. One of these conditioned outputs is a feedback signal for adjusting the flow sensor raw signals.
Another conditioned output is fed to a multiplexer in the conversion PCB input multiplexer.
Back-up ventilator (BUV). Provides fixed mode ventilation in the event of microprocessor failure.
Because the microprocessor cannot reliably be expected to control the pneumatics in such a case,
alternate non-CPU controlled circuitry is provided on the interface PCB to control some pneumatic
components.
The BUV can be initiated by the detection of a hardware or software problem (INIT/ active) or by a
SET/ command from the CPU. When the INIT/signal is applied to the BUV on the interface PCB, a
10-second timer is started. During this 10-second interval, the CPU executes POST. If POST does
not pass, the BUV takes control of the ventilator.
After BUV is initialized, a timer internal to the BUV outputs a signal (CLK), which controls the time
of the exhalation and inspiration periods (2/3 and 1/3). The BUV outputs a BUV signal, which
controls pneumatic components involved in BUV. If patient pressure is greater than 30 cmH2O above
PEEP, BUV outputs HIP.
Some of the pneumatic components energized during BUV include:
• Cross-over solenoid SOL3, energized when oxygen pressure switch PS1 is actuated.
• Exhalation pilot control solenoid SOL4, energized when inspiration is required and
patient pressure is less than 30 cmH2O above PEEP.
• Safety valve solenoid SOL5 and PEEP/CPAP solenoid SOL7, energized when PS1, PS2, or
PS3 is actuated.
The BUV supplies the analog multiplexer signals to determine the analog input to PSOL1 and
PSOL2. The selection of analog inputs is based on such variables as whether or not BUV is active
(state of BUV), whether inspiration or expiration is required (state of CLK), whether patient pressure
is less or more than HIP, and whether any of pressure switches PS1 through PS3 is actuated.
During BUV operation, the BACK UP VENTILATOR indicator on the front panel display is lit and
the alarm is sounded. The BUV LAMP signal (IDI7) is also output to the conversion PCB.
For a system-level operational description of BUV, refer to Section 2.4.3.5.
Motor compressor control circuit. Outputs the MC signal to energize a relay in the compressor
compartment; this relay turns on the compressor motor. The relay is energized when PS2 senses low
wall air pressure.
18050
Figure 2-34. Interface PCB Block Diagram
Solenoid interface. Conditions solenoid energizing signals from the conversion PCB. The solenoid
interface additionally permits solenoids to be operated independently of microprocessor control
during BUV, as follows:
• Cross-over solenoid SOL3 is energized when oxygen pressure switch PS1 is actuated and BUV is
active, or via computer control (IDO5).
• Exhalation pilot control solenoid SOL4 is energized during inspiration (CLK active), patient
pressure is less than 30 cmH2O above PEEP (HIP inactive), and BUV is active, or via computer
control (IDO6).
• Safety valve solenoid SOL5 and PEEP/CPAP solenoid SOL7 are energized when one of pressure
switches PS1, PS2, or PS3 is actuated and BUV is active, or via computer control (IDO7).
• Compressor unloading solenoid SOL9 is energized at compressor startup when BUV is active or
via computer control (IDO10).
Pressure switch interface. Conditions the pressure switch signals so that if a switch is energized
(closed contacts), PSx will be a 20 mA signal; and if the switch is de-energized (open contacts), PSx
will be a 0 mA signal.
Nurse call relay. Permits the NURSE’S CALL signal to be selectively transmitted to the utility
panel analog output connector. This analog output connector can be connected to an external device
and the NURSE’S CALL signal can be used to drive a lamp or alarm on that device. The NURSE’S
CALL signal is active (relay closed) when input signal IDO11 from the conversion PCB is active,
indicating an alarm condition, or during BUV (BUV signal active).
Proportional solenoid (PSOL) interface. Provides drive current ranging between 10 and 630 mA at
+10 V for PSOL1 and PSOL2. To generate these PSOL signals, the interface PCB conditions the 0 to
20 mA DAC outputs, DAC0 and DAC1. Signals DAC0 and DAC1 are then applied to a multiplexer,
which selects either the conversion PCB outputs or fixed oxygen and air values used by BUV.
The outputs of DAC0 and DAC1 are deselected when BUV is inactive (BUV signal inactive).
During BUV, fixed oxygen and air values are selected when inspiration is required (CLK active),
when patient pressure is less than 30 cmH2O above PEEP proportional pressure (HIP inactive),
provided one of pressure switches PS1, PS2, or PS3 is actuated.
Display controller interface. Interconnects and conditions the following signals going to the
DCI-display controller or display controller PCB. These signals include:
• BUV LAMP, which drives the front panel BACK UP VENTILATOR indicator when BUV is
active (BUV signal active).
• SAFETY VALVE OPEN LAMP, a +12 V, 20 mA drive signal generated any time the safety
valve, controlled by SOL5, is open (IDO7 active).
• METER, the DAC3 output. The output of DAC3 is also returned to the conversion PCB via the
multiplexer, allowing the testing of D/A conversion.
Battery charging circuit. Charges the lead-acid back-up batteries. The two 2 V batteries, located in
the utility panel, are constantly being charged while power is applied to the ventilator.
The CPU can disconnect the charging circuit from the batteries, for the purpose of checking battery
voltage, by activating the battery test output of the conversion PCB, IDO12. The battery voltage can
be measured through the BATTERY input of the multiplexer.
Under normal operating conditions, a steering circuit on the motherboard allows the charging circuit
to charge the batteries, but prevents the charging circuit from becoming a load to the batteries when
power is lost or when the ventilator is in storage. The steering circuit drives the battery back-up line,
VBATT, providing power to battery-backed RAM and to the audio alarm during a power failure.
Figure 2-23 shows battery power distribution.
Analog output connector (FLOW/PRESSURE) interface. Converts the output of DACs 4 and 5,
both of which range from 0 to 20 mA signals, to 0 to 10 V external analog output connector signals,
FLOW and PRESSURE. These signals are supplied to an external device through the utility panel
analog output connector.
A/D converter (A/DC) multiplexer. Supplies the conversion PCB with a pair of analog inputs
(+IN and -IN) for later conversion into their digital equivalents. Signal selections are made from
various analog signals, based on four channel enable signals (CE0/ through CE4/) supplied to the
interface PCB by the conversion PCB. The selection of an analog input is made from flow sensor
outputs (Q1, Q2, and Q3); temperature sensor outputs (T1, T2, and T3); pressure transducer outputs
(DP, P1, and P2); battery voltage (BATTERY); and the +10 V output from the conversion PCB. The
TEST signal is the output of DAC3 on the conversion PCB used in verifying that the A/D converter
is functioning properly.
2.3.12 Pulse Oximetry PCB Assembly

The optional pulse oximetry PCB assembly, shown in Figure 2-35, equips the ventilator to
measure arterial oxygen saturation and pulse rate. Oxygen saturation refers to the amount of
oxygen carried by hemoglobin. Expressed as a percent, oxygen saturation is the amount of
oxygen carried compared to total capacity. A ventilator with Pulse Oximetry displays the
oxygen saturation and pulse rate on the 20-character display. A separate speaker, which is part
of the pulse oximetry PCB assembly, beeps at the same rate as the pulse; the pitch of the beeps
varies as oxygen saturation varies. The speaker also sounds when the patient’s oxygen
saturation or pulse rate falls outside of operator-selected ranges.
The pulse oximetry PCB assembly consists of two PCBs: the Multibus PCB and the smaller
Biox PCB, which is attached to the Multibus PCB. The Biox PCB performs the actual pulse
oximetry functions, while the Multibus PCB interfaces the pulse oximetry hardware to the
ventilator via the Multibus.
2.3.12.1 General Principle of Operation

Pulse Oximetry measures the absorption of selected wavelengths of light passed through
living tissue. It is based on the principle that oxygenated hemoglobin (HbO2) and reduced
hemoglobin (Hb) absorb light at different levels. As a result of this known relationship, the
relative quantities of HbO2 and Hb can be calculated. Light transmitted through a tissue site
is partially absorbed by each constituent (Figure 2-36). For a given tissue location, the
absorption is constant except for the absorption from the added blood volume due
to arterial pulsation.
2.3.12.2 Operation of the Sensor

To monitor arterial oxygen saturation and pulse rate, the Pulse Oximetry feature employs a
photosensitive sensor or probe. This sensor is positioned on the patient to detect the
remaining light that the body has not absorbed. The probe consists of two LEDs and a
photodetector. Circuitry on the Biox PCB drives the LEDs in the sensor via the Multibus PCB.
After the light passes through the tissue, the photodetector senses the two light beams. Each
of the two LEDs emits a different wavelength of light. The tissue absorbs some of the light;
the remainder passes through the tissues and is sensed by the photodetector. The
photodetector then sends the pulse oximetry PCB assembly electrical signals corresponding
to the light sensed. These absorption measurements allow saturation and pulse rate to be
calculated.
PULSEOX
Figure 2-35. Pulse Oximetry PCB Assembly Block Diagram
Variable absorption
due to pulse-added
volume of HbO2
Absorption due
to HbO2
Absorption due
to Hb
Total absorption
Absorption due
to tissue
Time
2-00280
Figure 2-36. Absorption Factors in Pulse Oximetry
2.3.12.3 How Pulse Oximetry Is Implemented in the 7200 Series Ventilator

Following are some specifics of Pulse Oximetry’s implementation in the 7200
Series Ventilator:
• The Serial Communications Controller on the Multibus PCB handles transfer of digital
data between the Multibus and Biox PCBs.
• A jumper connector on the Multibus PCB permits selection of 50 or 60 Hz electrical power
to optimize ambient light rejection.
• A speaker connects directly to the Multibus PCB and is part of that PCB. The speaker
amplifier is on the Multibus PCB. Loudness is operator-controlled and established during
option 90 parameter selection. The operator can choose to mute the speaker.
• Under some conditions, the Biox PCB may issue a SHUTDOWN signal to the Multibus
PCB; the SHUTDOWN signal prompts the ventilator to remove power from the Biox PCB.
2.4 Operational Descriptions

The following subsections describe the operation of the 7200 Series Ventilator from a systems
point of view. Each subsection begins by describing the interaction between electronics and
pneumatics during inspiration and exhalation. It then continues with descriptions of various
ventilator functions arranged alphabetically. These operations are described under these
headings:
2.4.1 Breath Delivery
Inspiration
Exhalation
2.4.2 I/O Device Operation
Keyboard Operation
20-Character Display Operation
Numeric Display Operation
LED Indicators Operation
Alarm Summary Display Operation
Audio Alarm Operation
Analog Meter Operation
Nurse Call Operation
A/D Conversion
Proportional Solenoid Valve Operation
2.4.3 Emergency Operating Modes
Bus Timeout (BTO)
Power Failure
Watchdog Timeout
Initialization
Back-up Ventilation
Safety Valve Open
Wall Air-to-Compressor Switchover
Apnea Ventilation
Disconnect Ventilation
2.4.1 Breath Delivery

The breath delivery discussion describes how the ventilator delivers breaths during
inspiration, exhalation, and when PEEP/CPAP is active.
2.4.1.1 Inspiration
This discussion addresses inspiration during both mandatory and spontaneous breaths with a
description of the differences between mandatory and spontaneous breath, the gas supply,
the flow control, and the nebulizer operation.
Differences between mandatory and spontaneous breaths. During a mandatory inspiration
(Figure 2-37), a fixed volume of gas is delivered to the patient. Breath delivery may be initiated
when the ventilator senses patient inspiratory effort, when the ventilator’s breath timing dictates, or
when the operator presses the <MANUAL INSPIRATION> key. Provided the Flow-by option is not
active, the ventilator senses patient inspiratory effort based on the operator-selected
<SENSITIVITY> value. When the Flow-by option is in use, inspiration is triggered when the
ventilator senses that the flow to the patient exceeds the operator-selected threshold. The ventilator
terminates the breath when the operator-selected tidal volume is delivered or when patient pressure
exceeds the operator-selected high pressure limit.
During a spontaneous inspiration (Figure 2-38), the pneumatic system operates as it does during
mandatory inspiration, except that the patient always initiates the breath and draws whatever volume
the patient desires. The ventilator delivers gas at a rate sufficient to maintain the airway pressure near
the preselected <PEEP/CPAP> level minus <SENSITIVITY>. For example, if <PEEP/CPAP> is set
to 10 cmH2O and <SENSITIVITY> to 2 cmH2O, the airway pressure is maintained near 8 cmH2O.
The ventilator terminates the spontaneous breath when system pressure, sensed at the proximal
airway, exceeds the baseline pressure by approximately 1 cmH2O. If Flow-by is active, exhalation
begins when the exhaled flow (sensed by Q3) exceeds the delivered flow (sensed by Q1 and Q2) by
2 lpm.
Gas supply. During inspiration, air for delivery to the patient and to power the PEEP/CPAP and
safety valve systems is provided by external air, if available, or by the compressor. Components in
the wall gas supply or the compressor system sense the gas pressure and direct gas from either source
(refer to descriptions of wall gas supply and compressor operation earlier in this section.) Oxygen
from an external source is regulated and supplied to the ventilator through a pneumatic circuit almost
identical to the wall air supply circuit.
Figure 2-37 and Figure 2-38 show gas being supplied by an external source. Figure 2-39 shows the
pressures and flows involved in the gas supply. In that figure, the compressor is active.
Flow control. Oxygen and air, either from the wall supply or compressor, are now delivered to the
proportional solenoid valves, PSOL1 and PSOL2. The computer samples the gas flow measurements
from Q1/T1 and Q2/T2. Then, based on the operator-selected tidal volume, oxygen percentage,
breath rate, peak flow, waveform, and these flow readings, the CPU adjusts PSOL1 and PSOL2 as
necessary. As a result, the patient receives breaths with these operator-selected parameters. Mixed
gas now flows from the junction of PSOL1 and PSOL2 (Figure 2-40), through the safety valve
assembly, through the main flow bacteria filter, and to the patient system.
Nebulizer operation. The nebulizer system operates during inspiration only. If the operator-selected
nebulization, one of the nebulizer solenoids, SOL1 or SOL2, is energized. If an oxygen percentage
greater than 60 was selected, SOL1 supplies pure oxygen to the nebulizer. If an oxygen percentage of
60 or less was selected, SOL2 supplies air to the nebulizer. Figure 2-41 shows the operation of the
nebulizer. Figure 2-37 shows an inspiration without nebulization active, while Figure 2-38 shows an
inspiration with nebulization and an oxygen percentage of 70.
2.4.1.2 Exhalation
Exhalation (Figure 2-42) begins after the ventilator has delivered the operator-selected
volume of gas, and after the operator-selected plateau period (mandatory breaths) or as
demanded by the patient (spontaneous breaths). In either case, as the patient exhales, the
exhalation pilot control solenoid SOL4, which is de-energized, allows PEEP proportional
pressure from the jet venturi to pilot the exhalation valve open to PEEP. This allows the
exhaled gas to enter the exhalation system through the heated filter.
After being heated, the exhaled gas continues to the exhalation flow and temperature sensors
Q3/T3. Exhaled flow data is used to determine the patient’s exhaled volume. From there, the
exhaled gas is vented from the ventilator. If the ventilator has an internal exhalation valve,
the gas is vented through this opened valve.
Figure 2-43 and Figure 2-44 show gas pressures and flows during exhalation. Figure 2-45
shows the operation of PEEP during exhalation.
2-00144
Figure 2-37. Mandatory Inspiration with 50%

O2, Wall Air, and Nebulizer Inactive
2-00145
Figure 2-38. Spontaneous Inspiration with

70% O2, Wall Air, and Nebulizer Active
O2 REGULATOR
REG 1 10 psig nominal
F2 O2 TEMPERATURE
CHECK VALVE O2 SCREEN SENSORS
CV1 FILTER F11
CROSS-OVER SOLENOID
50 PSI O2
O2 PRESSURE VENT
SWITCH NC C SILENCER PROPORTIONAL
O2 WATER PS1 AIR SOLENOID
FILTER F1 REG 2 ASSEMBLY
NO
AIR AIR FLOW AND
FILTER AIR TEMPERATURE
CHECK VALVE AIR SCREEN SENSORS
CV2 FILTER F10
50 PSI AIR F7
AIR PRESSURE
SWITCH PILOT
AIR WATER PS2 PRESSURE
TRAP AND OUTLET
FILTER 10 psig nominal
FILTER F3
1 - 3.6 lpm
COMPRESSOR PRESSURE
SWITCH PS3
CV4
COMPRESSOR 10 psig nominal
CHECK VALVE
0 - 120 lpm
COMPRESSOR
BACK
PRESSURE
REGULATOR
COMPRESSOR
UNLOADING
SOLENOID REG 3
HEAT
EXCHANGER
OUTLET INLET
FILTER FILTER
INLET
SILENCER
COMPRESSOR/PEDESTAL
10 psig nominal
2-00150
120 lpm
Figure 2-39. Gas Supply
0 – 120 cmH2O 0 – 120 cmH2O
0 – 180 slpm 0 – 180 lpm
10 psig nominal
0 – 180 lpm
P1
ABSOLUTE
SOL PRESSURE
1 P2
TRANSDUCER
P2
O2 R5
P2 INLET
NEBULIZER DAMPING
SOLENOID RESTRICTOR CV3
SAFETY/CHECK
PSOL 1 VALVE
PROPORTIONAL
SOLENOID
VALVE
ASSEMBLY
EXHALATION
PSOL 2 PILOT
PRESSURE SV
SOL
2 NETWORK OUT
R7
CV6
AIR
IN
SOL5 SAFETY
NEBULIZER CV7 VALVE SOLENOID
SOLENOID
R2 SAFETY VALVE
PILOT RESTRICTOR
R6
SAFETY VALVE
PILOT RESTRICTOR
R1
10 psig nominal
2-00281
Figure 2-40. Flow of Mixed Gas from PSOL1 and PSOL2
10 psig nominal
0 – 10 lpm
P1
ABSOLUTE
SOL PRESSURE
1 P2
TRANSDUCER
P2
O2 R5
P2 INLET
NEBULIZER DAMPING
SAFETY/CHECK
PSOL 1 VALVE
PROPORTIONAL
SOLENOID
VALVE
ASSEMBLY
EXHALATION
PSOL 2 PILOT
PRESSURE SV
SOL
2 NETWORK OUT
R7
CV6
AIR
IN
SOL5 SAFETY
NEBULIZER CV7 VALVE SOLENOID
SOLENOID
R2 SAFETY VALVE
PILOT RESTRICTOR
R6
SAFETY VALVE
PILOT RESTRICTOR
R1
2-00282
Figure 2-41. Nebulizer Operation
2-00146
Figure 2-42. Exhalation with Compressor

Active and Nebulizer Inactive
0 - 41 cmH2O
No flow DP
AUTOZERO
SOLENOID
SOL6
EXHALATION IN OUT
PILOT
CONTROL BUV
SOLENOID NC P1 PRESSURE
PS4
SOL SWITCH
4 DP
C
P2
DIFFERENTIAL
0 - 120 PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER
cmH2O

VALVE CV5
Q3/T3
EXHALATION FLOW HEATED COLLECTOR

EXHALATION AND TEMPERATURE BACTERIA FILTER VIAL
COMPARTMENT SENSORS
0 - 200 lpm 0 - 200 lpm 0 - 120 cmH2O 0 - 200 lpm

2-00152
Figure 2-43. Exhalation System Operation (Internal Exhalation Valve)
F9
PATIENT
0 - 120 cmH2O PRESSURE
FILTER
No flow
0 - 41 cmH2O DP
AUTOZERO PATIENT
SOLENOID PRESSURE
SOL6
PATIENT
EXHALATION IN OUT PRESSURE
PILOT WATER TRAP
CONTROL BUV
SOLENOID NC P1 PS4 PRESSURE
SOL SWITCH
4 DP
C 0 - 120 cmH2O
AIR
CAPACITOR P2
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
EXHALATION
VALVE
COMPARTMENT CV5
Q3/T3
EXHALATION FLOW HEATED

AND TEMPERATURE BACTERIA FILTER COLLECTOR
VENT SENSORS VIAL
2-00151
0 - 200 slpm 0 - 200 lpm 0 - 200 lpm
Figure 2-44. Exhalation System Operation (External Exhalation Valve)
0 – 6 psig 10 psig nominal 0 - 41 cmH2O
0 – 2.6 lpm 0 – 1.2 lpm No flow
R1
ADJUSTABLE
RESTRICTOR
NO R3
REG
IN OUT 5
F8 DAMPING EXHALATION
JV JET RESTRICTOR PILOT
VENTURI FILTER CONTROL
SOL7 SOLENOID NC
PEEP/ PEEP/CPAP
CPAP REGULATOR SOL
SOLENOID 4
PEEP/CPAP R4 C
PRESSURE P1 DAMPING AIR
TRANSDUCER RESTRICTOR CAPACITOR
NO
P2 SOL8
P1 AUTOZERO
SOLENOID
OUT IN
EXHALATION
VALVE
EXHALATION
COMPARTMENT 2-00283
Figure 2-45. PEEP Operation during Exhalation

The following describes how the ventilator receives input (from keyboard and by monitoring
analog devices) and how the ventilator outputs information to such devices as the displays,
the audio alarm, and the proportional solenoid valves.
2.4.2.1 Keyboard Operation (Figure 2-46)

Keyboard control is accomplished largely by the Intel 8279-5 Programmable Keyboard/
Display Interface, located on the DCI-display controller or the display controller PCB. The
keyboard interface scans the keyboard matrix for pressed keys. A scan counter inside the
interface continuously generates a count, which is output over keyboard scan lines BSL0
through BSL2 through the front panel display PCB to the keyboard. The 3-bit count is
supplied to the scan decoder on the front panel display PCB, which sequentially asserts each
of eight output lines KS0 through KS7. Each output line corresponds to a row on the keyboard
matrix. When a key is pressed, a keyswitch is closed, allowing current to flow through the
activated row to the column where the closed keyswitch is located. The state of each of the
eight columns in the keyboard matrix is buffered and sent to the DCI-display controller PCB
or display controller PCB via the front panel display PCB over keyboard return lines RL0
through RL7.
Signals RL0 through RL7 are buffered and latched in the keyboard interface. The keyboard
interface scans the lines, looking for a keyswitch closure. When a keyswitch closure is found,
a debounce circuit within the keyboard controller waits and rechecks the keyswitch for
closure. If two keys are simultaneously pressed, the 2-key lockout feature of the keyboard
interface prevents either key from being recognized until only one remains pressed.
If the switch remains closed, the column and row addresses of the switch in the keyboard
matrix are transferred into a 1-byte FIFO buffer within the keyboard interface. The presence
of data in the FIFO buffer causes the keyboard interface to generate IRQ to the CPU. The CPU
responds by appropriately setting the control and address lines to the keyboard interface to
read a byte of data over data lines D0 through D7. The CPU then resets IRQ.
The above described procedure is repeated for each pressed key.
8088-15
Figure 2-46. Keyboard Operation
2.4.2.2 20-Character Display Operation (Figure 2-47)

A fixed RAM address is assigned to each character position of the 20-character display. To
initiate display operation, the CPU addresses that RAM location. This address is routed to
RAM via the refresh address selector, which places either a memory address (A0 through A5)
or a refresh address (RA0 through RA5) on the RAM address lines, based on the state
of DISPSEL/.
Seven-bit ASCII and decimal point data (AN0 through AN6 and ANDP, respectively) is output
from RAM and clocked out of the DCI-display controller or display controller PCB via latches.
Latching limits the transfer of data between RAM and the front panel to periods of display
refreshing (REFCLK active and DISPSEL/ inactive).
The ASCII code is furnished to a character generator PROM, located on the front panel
display PCB, where the 14-segment character representation is generated. This character
generation is accomplished in two parts. During the display blanking period (BREFCLK
active), segments h through r are generated. This segment and decimal point data is latched
into a register at the end of the blanking period. After the blanking period, segments a
through g are generated and latched.
Drivers amplify any of the 14 signals necessary to form the segmented 20-character display.
These buffered signals are output to the display.
After the appropriate segment signals for a character have been turned on, the grid signal
corresponding to the character position (one of grid signals G1 through G22) is applied,
causing the character to illuminate.
The process of displaying a character is repeated for each additional character, moving to the
left across the display panel.
When the CPU is not addressing RAM, either to write new data to it or to read data for
display, display refreshing takes place. During display refreshing, the timing circuit repeatedly
furnishes 6-bit refresh addresses (RA0 through RA5) to the refresh address selector. Each
refresh address corresponds to the lowest six bits of a memory address, so the receipt of each
refresh address causes the continuous re-outputting of the data on the display.
8088-19
Figure 2-47. 20-Character Display Operation
2.4.2.3 Numeric Display Operation (Figure 2-48)

A fixed RAM address is assigned to each character position of the numeric display. To initiate
display operation, the CPU addresses that RAM location. This address is routed to RAM via
the refresh address selector, which places either a memory address (A0 through A5) or a
refresh address (RA0 through RA5) on the RAM address lines, based on the state of DISPSEL/.
Four-bit BCD and decimal point data (NUM0 through NUM3 and NUMDP) is output from
RAM and clocked out of the display controller PCB via latches. Latches limit the transfer of
data between RAM and the front panel to periods of display refreshing (REFCLK active and
DISPSEL/ inactive).
The BCD code is furnished to a 7-segment decoder-driver located on the front panel display
PCB. After the appropriate segment signals for a character position (one of grid signals G1
through G22) are applied, the character illuminates. The process of displaying a character is
repeated for each additional character.
When the CPU is not addressing RAM either to write new data to it or to read data for display,
display refreshing takes place. During display refreshing, the timing circuit repeatedly
furnishes 6-bit refresh addresses (RA0 through RA5) to the lowest six bits of a memory
address, so the receipt of each refresh address causes the continuous re-outputting of display
data already on display.
8088-18
Figure 2-48. Numeric Display Operation
2.4.2.4 LED Indicators Operation (Figure 2-49)
To turn on an LED indicator, LED control bits AN0 through AN1, which are stored in the
20-character display RAM, are gated with a pulse from an astable multivibrator to determine
whether an indicator will be lit, and if so, whether it will flash. In ventilators with the
enhanced console, the LEDs are latched on and remain lit, whereas in ventilators with the
basic console, the LEDs are lit, then are continuously refreshed so they appear to be
continuously lit. Each indicator is associated with an address. An indicator can be lit when its
address is on lines BRA0 through BRA5 and BREFCLK is low.
On the Enhanced-Plus or enhanced console, two LEDs comprise an LED indicator. On the
basic console, one LED comprises an LED indicator.
8088-16
Figure 2-49. LED Indicator Operation
2.4.2.5 Alarm Summary Display Operation (Figure 2-50)
On the enhanced console, five LEDs comprise an alarm summary display indicator. On the
basic console, the alarm summary display indicators are incandescent lamps.
To turn on an alarm summary display indicator, lamp control bits NUM0 and NUM1, which
are stored in the lamp/numeric display RAM locations, are gated with a pulse from an astable
multivibrator to determine whether a lamp will be lit, and if so, whether it will flash. One
indicator, addressable by refresh address lines BRA0 through BRA5, can be lit at one time. The
indicator remains lit until the current state of the indicator data changes or until the data
latch is disabled.
2.4.2.6 Audio Alarm Operation (Figure 2-51)

The 7200 Series Ventilator incorporates an audio alarm. The alarm may sound with a
continuous tone or may pulsate. For the continuous-tone and earlier pulsating alarms, the
alarm speaker is connected directly to the front panel display PCB. For pulsating alarms in
recent units, the alarm activating signal from the front panel display PCB passes through a
small printed circuit board, the pulsed alarm PCB, to which the speaker is connected.
The alarm volume is controlled by potentiometer R1, which is part of the utility panel
harness. The alarm is activated under control of data stored in latches on the conversion PCB,
or during BUV, it is activated by the EXT ALRM/ signal on the conversion PCB.
Normally, the alarm is powered by the +5 V supply. When power is lost, the audio alarm
operates off the batteries.
2.4.2.7 Analog Meter Operation (Figure 2-52)

In ventilators with an enhanced or basic console, an analog meter on the front panel displays
airway pressure, and in ventilators with the basic console, a choice of exhaled volume. The
data to be displayed is output from the CPU PCB and into the conversion PCB. Here, DAC3
converts this data into its analog equivalent. This data is then routed through the interface
PCB, through the DCI-display controller or display controller PCB, through the front panel
display PCB, and to the analog meter.
In the Enhanced-Plus console, the analog meter is replaced by a dual-scale vertical bar graph
that displays airway pressure.
8088-17
Figure 2-50. Alarm Summary Display Operation
ALARM
Figure 2-51. Audio Alarm Operation
8088-14
Figure 2-52. Analog Meter Operation
2.4.2.8 Nurse Call Operation (Figure 2-53)
The ventilator provides a nurse call signal, which can be used when interfacing the ventilator
to an external device. The signal, which is active in almost all cases when the audio alarm is
also active, provides output through the analog output connector on the utility panel. The
ventilator does not supply power to a nurse call device.
The CPU makes a decision to energize the nurse call relay K1 on the interface PCB whenever
the audio alarm is active (except during POST and lamp test). The controlling bit is output
from the CPU PCB and is optically isolated in the conversion PCB, then applied to the
interface PCB as a +12 V signal, IDO11. Here, the controlling bit is ORed with the BUV signal,
resulting in the nurse call relay being energized either under software control (IDO11 high) or
whenever the BUV signal is high. When the relay coil is energized, the normally open relay is
closed, applying the active nurse call signal to the analog output connector.
2.4.2.9 A/D Conversion (Figure 2-54)

Analog device signals are applied to a multiplexer on the interface PCB. A single device’s
outputs are selected, based on software-controlled chip enable inputs (CE0/ through CE4/).
The multiplexed outputs are then applied to an A/D converter on the conversion PCB. The
eight-bit wide digital representation is placed on the Multibus as data to be read by the CPU.
2.4.2.10 Proportional Solenoid Valve Operation (Figure 2-55)

The size of the proportional solenoid valve (PSOL) openings determines the gas flow to the
patient. To control the openings, the CPU outputs data from 12-bit wide ports on the CPU
PCB to the conversion PCB. Here, data to control each PSOL is converted to an analog signal
by the PSOL’s own DAC. The analog signal is applied to a PSOL input selector, which
normally selects the DAC outputs. (If the ventilator is in BUV, however, values supplied by
BUV volume potentiometers R85 and R86 are supplied to the selector.) The resulting analog
signal passes through the motherboard to drive the PSOL.
8088-13
Figure 2-53. Nurse Call Operation
AD-CON
Figure 2-54. A/D Conversion
0 – 6 psig 10 psig nominal 0 - 41 cmH2O
0 – 2.6 lpm 0 – 1.2 lpm No flow
R1
ADJUSTABLE
RESTRICTOR
NO R3
REG
IN OUT 5
F8 DAMPING EXHALATION
JV JET RESTRICTOR PILOT
VENTURI FILTER CONTROL
SOL7 SOLENOID NC
PEEP/ PEEP/CPAP
CPAP REGULATOR SOL
SOLENOID 4
PEEP/CPAP R4 C
PRESSURE P1 DAMPING AIR
TRANSDUCER RESTRICTOR CAPACITOR
NO
P2 SOL8
P1 AUTOZERO
SOLENOID
OUT IN
EXHALATION
VALVE
EXHALATION
COMPARTMENT 2-00283
Figure 2-45. PEEP Operation during Exhalation

The following describes how the ventilator receives input (from keyboard and by monitoring
analog devices) and how the ventilator outputs information to such devices as the displays,
the audio alarm, and the proportional solenoid valves.
2.4.2.1 Keyboard Operation (Figure 2-46)

Keyboard control is accomplished largely by the Intel 8279-5 Programmable Keyboard/
Display Interface, located on the DCI-display controller or the display controller PCB. The
keyboard interface scans the keyboard matrix for pressed keys. A scan counter inside the
interface continuously generates a count, which is output over keyboard scan lines BSL0
through BSL2 through the front panel display PCB to the keyboard. The 3-bit count is
supplied to the scan decoder on the front panel display PCB, which sequentially asserts each
of eight output lines KS0 through KS7. Each output line corresponds to a row on the keyboard
matrix. When a key is pressed, a keyswitch is closed, allowing current to flow through the
activated row to the column where the closed keyswitch is located. The state of each of the
eight columns in the keyboard matrix is buffered and sent to the DCI-display controller PCB
or display controller PCB via the front panel display PCB over keyboard return lines RL0
through RL7.
Signals RL0 through RL7 are buffered and latched in the keyboard interface. The keyboard
interface scans the lines, looking for a keyswitch closure. When a keyswitch closure is found,
a debounce circuit within the keyboard controller waits and rechecks the keyswitch for
closure. If two keys are simultaneously pressed, the 2-key lockout feature of the keyboard
interface prevents either key from being recognized until only one remains pressed.
If the switch remains closed, the column and row addresses of the switch in the keyboard
matrix are transferred into a 1-byte FIFO buffer within the keyboard interface. The presence
of data in the FIFO buffer causes the keyboard interface to generate IRQ to the CPU. The CPU
responds by appropriately setting the control and address lines to the keyboard interface to
read a byte of data over data lines D0 through D7. The CPU then resets IRQ.
The above described procedure is repeated for each pressed key.
8088-15
Figure 2-46. Keyboard Operation
2.4.2.2 20-Character Display Operation (Figure 2-47)

A fixed RAM address is assigned to each character position of the 20-character display. To
initiate display operation, the CPU addresses that RAM location. This address is routed to
RAM via the refresh address selector, which places either a memory address (A0 through A5)
or a refresh address (RA0 through RA5) on the RAM address lines, based on the state
of DISPSEL/.
Seven-bit ASCII and decimal point data (AN0 through AN6 and ANDP, respectively) is output
from RAM and clocked out of the DCI-display controller or display controller PCB via latches.
Latching limits the transfer of data between RAM and the front panel to periods of display
refreshing (REFCLK active and DISPSEL/ inactive).
The ASCII code is furnished to a character generator PROM, located on the front panel
display PCB, where the 14-segment character representation is generated. This character
generation is accomplished in two parts. During the display blanking period (BREFCLK
active), segments h through r are generated. This segment and decimal point data is latched
into a register at the end of the blanking period. After the blanking period, segments a
through g are generated and latched.
Drivers amplify any of the 14 signals necessary to form the segmented 20-character display.
These buffered signals are output to the display.
After the appropriate segment signals for a character have been turned on, the grid signal
corresponding to the character position (one of grid signals G1 through G22) is applied,
causing the character to illuminate.
The process of displaying a character is repeated for each additional character, moving to the
left across the display panel.
When the CPU is not addressing RAM, either to write new data to it or to read data for
display, display refreshing takes place. During display refreshing, the timing circuit repeatedly
furnishes 6-bit refresh addresses (RA0 through RA5) to the refresh address selector. Each
refresh address corresponds to the lowest six bits of a memory address, so the receipt of each
refresh address causes the continuous re-outputting of the data on the display.
8088-19
Figure 2-47. 20-Character Display Operation
2.4.2.3 Numeric Display Operation (Figure 2-48)

A fixed RAM address is assigned to each character position of the numeric display. To initiate
display operation, the CPU addresses that RAM location. This address is routed to RAM via
the refresh address selector, which places either a memory address (A0 through A5) or a
refresh address (RA0 through RA5) on the RAM address lines, based on the state of DISPSEL/.
Four-bit BCD and decimal point data (NUM0 through NUM3 and NUMDP) is output from
RAM and clocked out of the display controller PCB via latches. Latches limit the transfer of
data between RAM and the front panel to periods of display refreshing (REFCLK active and
DISPSEL/ inactive).
The BCD code is furnished to a 7-segment decoder-driver located on the front panel display
PCB. After the appropriate segment signals for a character position (one of grid signals G1
through G22) are applied, the character illuminates. The process of displaying a character is
repeated for each additional character.
When the CPU is not addressing RAM either to write new data to it or to read data for display,
display refreshing takes place. During display refreshing, the timing circuit repeatedly
furnishes 6-bit refresh addresses (RA0 through RA5) to the lowest six bits of a memory
address, so the receipt of each refresh address causes the continuous re-outputting of display
data already on display.
8088-18
Figure 2-48. Numeric Display Operation
2.4.2.4 LED Indicators Operation (Figure 2-49)
To turn on an LED indicator, LED control bits AN0 through AN1, which are stored in the
20-character display RAM, are gated with a pulse from an astable multivibrator to determine
whether an indicator will be lit, and if so, whether it will flash. In ventilators with the
enhanced console, the LEDs are latched on and remain lit, whereas in ventilators with the
basic console, the LEDs are lit, then are continuously refreshed so they appear to be
continuously lit. Each indicator is associated with an address. An indicator can be lit when its
address is on lines BRA0 through BRA5 and BREFCLK is low.
On the Enhanced-Plus or enhanced console, two LEDs comprise an LED indicator. On the
basic console, one LED comprises an LED indicator.
8088-16
Figure 2-49. LED Indicator Operation
2.4.2.5 Alarm Summary Display Operation (Figure 2-50)
On the enhanced console, five LEDs comprise an alarm summary display indicator. On the
basic console, the alarm summary display indicators are incandescent lamps.
To turn on an alarm summary display indicator, lamp control bits NUM0 and NUM1, which
are stored in the lamp/numeric display RAM locations, are gated with a pulse from an astable
multivibrator to determine whether a lamp will be lit, and if so, whether it will flash. One
indicator, addressable by refresh address lines BRA0 through BRA5, can be lit at one time. The
indicator remains lit until the current state of the indicator data changes or until the data
latch is disabled.
2.4.2.6 Audio Alarm Operation (Figure 2-51)

The 7200 Series Ventilator incorporates an audio alarm. The alarm may sound with a
continuous tone or may pulsate. For the continuous-tone and earlier pulsating alarms, the
alarm speaker is connected directly to the front panel display PCB. For pulsating alarms in
recent units, the alarm activating signal from the front panel display PCB passes through a
small printed circuit board, the pulsed alarm PCB, to which the speaker is connected.
The alarm volume is controlled by potentiometer R1, which is part of the utility panel
harness. The alarm is activated under control of data stored in latches on the conversion PCB,
or during BUV, it is activated by the EXT ALRM/ signal on the conversion PCB.
Normally, the alarm is powered by the +5 V supply. When power is lost, the audio alarm
operates off the batteries.
2.4.2.7 Analog Meter Operation (Figure 2-52)

In ventilators with an enhanced or basic console, an analog meter on the front panel displays
airway pressure, and in ventilators with the basic console, a choice of exhaled volume. The
data to be displayed is output from the CPU PCB and into the conversion PCB. Here, DAC3
converts this data into its analog equivalent. This data is then routed through the interface
PCB, through the DCI-display controller or display controller PCB, through the front panel
display PCB, and to the analog meter.
In the Enhanced-Plus console, the analog meter is replaced by a dual-scale vertical bar graph
that displays airway pressure.
8088-17
Figure 2-50. Alarm Summary Display Operation
ALARM
Figure 2-51. Audio Alarm Operation
8088-14
Figure 2-52. Analog Meter Operation
2.4.2.8 Nurse Call Operation (Figure 2-53)
The ventilator provides a nurse call signal, which can be used when interfacing the ventilator
to an external device. The signal, which is active in almost all cases when the audio alarm is
also active, provides output through the analog output connector on the utility panel. The
ventilator does not supply power to a nurse call device.
The CPU makes a decision to energize the nurse call relay K1 on the interface PCB whenever
the audio alarm is active (except during POST and lamp test). The controlling bit is output
from the CPU PCB and is optically isolated in the conversion PCB, then applied to the
interface PCB as a +12 V signal, IDO11. Here, the controlling bit is ORed with the BUV signal,
resulting in the nurse call relay being energized either under software control (IDO11 high) or
whenever the BUV signal is high. When the relay coil is energized, the normally open relay is
closed, applying the active nurse call signal to the analog output connector.
2.4.2.9 A/D Conversion (Figure 2-54)

Analog device signals are applied to a multiplexer on the interface PCB. A single device’s
outputs are selected, based on software-controlled chip enable inputs (CE0/ through CE4/).
The multiplexed outputs are then applied to an A/D converter on the conversion PCB. The
eight-bit wide digital representation is placed on the Multibus as data to be read by the CPU.
2.4.2.10 Proportional Solenoid Valve Operation (Figure 2-55)

The size of the proportional solenoid valve (PSOL) openings determines the gas flow to the
patient. To control the openings, the CPU outputs data from 12-bit wide ports on the CPU
PCB to the conversion PCB. Here, data to control each PSOL is converted to an analog signal
by the PSOL’s own DAC. The analog signal is applied to a PSOL input selector, which
normally selects the DAC outputs. (If the ventilator is in BUV, however, values supplied by
BUV volume potentiometers R85 and R86 are supplied to the selector.) The resulting analog
signal passes through the motherboard to drive the PSOL.
8088-13
Figure 2-53. Nurse Call Operation
AD-CON
Figure 2-54. A/D Conversion
8088-9
Figure 2-55. Proportional Solenoid Valve

Operation
2.4.3 Emergency Operating Modes

The following describes how the ventilator operates under operating conditions such as
during a power failure, when the electronics are determined to be unreliable, or when the
patient is apneic. Emergency operating modes provide a reserve operational capability to
allow necessary changes to be made until normal operations can be resumed.
2.4.3.1 Bus Timeout (BTO) (Figure 2-56)

When the ventilator is functioning properly, a 2 ms bus timer on the CPU PCB (part of the
microprocessor in the 80188 CPU PCB or part of the timing section in the 8088 CPU PCB) is
continually strobed by the Address Latch Enable (ALE) signal, which is generated to tell the
system that a new address is on the bus. If a hardware failure occurs that affects the
generation of the ALE signal, this timer times out and sends a BTO/ signal to the
non-maskable interrupt (NMI) circuit. As a result, a 48F9 error is declared. A non-maskable
interrupt, the highest priority interrupt, is then sent to the CPU. After completing the
execution of the current instruction, the CPU inhibits the strobing of the watchdog timer;
this causes a watchdog timeout. See the subsequent description of the watchdog timeout for
further information.
8088-1
Figure 2-56. Bus Timeout Operation
2.4.3.2 Power Failure (Figure 2-57)
If ac power is interrupted momentarily, if there is a long-term ac power loss at its source, if
ventilator power is turned off at the utility panel, or if the +5 V power supply output
otherwise decays, the ventilator considers a power failure to have occurred. In any case, the
ventilator acts to place the ventilator circuitry into a known state. Exactly how the ventilator
accomplishes this orderly shutdown varies depending on the magnitude and duration of the
power failure.
When ac voltage is low. The power fail module, which is part of the power supply assembly,
continually monitors the ac input voltage to verify that the ac input voltage does not drop
below the applicable trip point:
Should be Actually
100 V ac <81 to 83 V ac
115 V ac <94 to 96 V ac
220 V ac <186 to 188 V ac
240 V ac <203 to 205 V ac
If the ac input voltage does drop below the trip point, the power fail module’s INT0/ output
goes low. This signal is sent over the Multibus to the CPU PCB, where it causes a
non-maskable interrupt (NMI) to the CPU. The CPU completes execution of the current
instruction, then the CPU services the interrupt. The CPU now inhibits the strobing of the
watchdog timer, causing a watchdog timeout to occur (see subsequent subsection on
watchdog timeout). As a result, the INIT/ signal is generated, causing the ventilator to be
placed in a known state in an orderly fashion (see subsequent subsection on initialization).
During POST, the CPU checks whether the power fail output signal (INT0/) is still low. If
INT0/ is still low, then the [LOW AC POWER] message is displayed. If the CPU cannot restart,
then the INIT/ signal stays low and the ventilator goes into BUV. When ac power returns to
the threshold value, the ventilator returns to normal operation, beginning by running POST.
(See subsection on BUV operation.)
When ac voltages decay, the power supply output may also decay.
When +5 V power supply output is out of range. If the +5 V power supply output goes
below +4.775 V or above +5.225 V, the power sequencer on the DCI-display controller or
display controller PCB causes the initialize (INIT/) signal to be applied to various ventilator
circuits, putting the ventilator into a known state (refer to subsequent subsection on
ventilator initialization). The INIT/ signal is gated with the output from a timer, ensuring
INIT/ a minimum pulse width of 80 ms.
If the +5 V power supply output continues to decay, the ventilator takes other actions. When
the +5 V output becomes less than the battery output (+4.0 to +4.4 V when batteries are new),
VBATT power to RAM and audio alarm circuits, etc., switches to battery power. See
Section 2.3.3 (battery power distribution). This action protects the integrity of battery-backed
RAM while power is being lost. Data in RAM is needed by the CPU to restore the ventilator
conditions to those that existed before ac power loss.
If the +5 V supply output falls below +3 V, relay K1 in the power sequencer clamps the INIT/
signal to ground. This relay, which is normally energized, is de-energized at +3 V, causing the
contacts to close, and grounding INIT/. This relay ensures that the ventilator will be
initialized even though the CPU operation and +5 V supply are unreliable. If the CPU cannot
restart, then the INIT/ signal stays low and the ventilator goes into back-up ventilation
(BUV). When ac power returns to the threshold value, the ventilator returns to normal
operation, beginning by running POST. See the subsequent discussion of BUV operation.
8088-8
Figure 2-57. Power Failure Operation
2.4.3.3 Watchdog Timeout (Figure 2-58)

The CPU constantly monitors software execution. If the software is running correctly, the
CPU causes the watchdog timer to be strobed via the WDSTB line. Should the CPU detect a
problem, such as a bus timeout (see preceding discussion on bus timeout) or a power fail
condition (see preceding subsection on power failure), the CPU stops strobing the timer and
the timer times out.
On the megaCPU PCB or the 80188 CPU PCB, the watchdog timer is then started. If 62.5 ms
elapse and the timer has not been strobed, the timer times out, resulting in a 500 ms INIT/
signal being generated. The INIT/ signal initializes the ventilator to a known state (see
subsequent subsection on initialization), and can result in BUV starting.
On the 8088 CPU PCB, when the watchdog timer times out, it sends an ALARM/ signal to the
display controller PCB. Here, a timer (part of the power sequencer) is started, resulting in a 25
ms INIT/ pulse being generated (see next subsection). INIT/ initializes the ventilator to a
known state, and can result in BUV beginning.
8088-2
Figure 2-58. Watchdog Timeout
2.4.3.4 Initialization (Figure 2-59)

Under certain circumstances, like during powerup or after power is restored following a
power failure, the ventilator takes steps to reset the ventilator electronics to a known state.
The electronics are put into this initialized state by the INIT/ signal, which is generated by
one of the following:
• The power sequencer on the DCI-display controller PCB (80188-based units) or the
display controller PCB (8088-based units)
• The watchdog timer on the 80188 CPU PCB
• The clock generator on the 8088 CPU PCB
The INIT/ signal is routed to various PCBs via the Multibus, resulting in these actions
being taken:
• The CPU Is placed in the reset state.
• The CPU PCB LEDs are turned off.
• Battery-backed RAM is disabled, preventing damage to data.
• The keyboard is locked.
• Real-time clock inputs and outputs are disabled.
• The audio alarm latches on the conversion PCB are cleared.
The INIT/ signal also starts the BUV timer, which will place the ventilator into BUV in
10 seconds if POST fails.
TRI-BUV
Figure 2-59. Initialization
2.4.3.5 Back-up Ventilation (Figure 2-60)

The ventilator invokes an emergency ventilation mode called back-up ventilation (BUV).
BUV allows the ventilator to operate completely free of CPU control if the CPU fails or if a
critical failure of the electrical system occurs. Because the CPU cannot reliably be expected to
control the pneumatics in such a case, alternate non-CPU controlled circuitry is provided on
the interface PCB to control some pneumatic components. BUV is an emergency operating
mode so the ventilator must be removed from the patient and replaced by a ventilator which
has undergone a successful EST.
When the ventilator is in BUV, the BACK-UP VENTILATOR alarm summary display is lit and
the audible alarm is sounded, if possible. In addition, the 20-character display may show a
message. Table 2-3 helps you interpret the cause of BUV.
Table 2-3: Back-up Ventilation Causes and Indications
20-character
Type of failures Cause
display
3 system errors within 24 hours ERR 1501 Three system errors (codes 3000 - 50FF) recorded in
operating time DO NOT USE battery-backed RAM within 24 hour operating time.
POST failure Error code or blank POST failed for any reason. To return ventilator to normal
operation, correct problem that caused POST failure or
successfully complete EST.
Fault detected 99xx A hardware fault that could compromise safe ventilation was
DO NOT USE detected. The ventilator goes into BUV when the ventilator is
powered off, then on. See error description in Section 6.
ac power low LOW Monitored ac power dropped below trip point for prolonged
AC POWER period. When ac returns to acceptable level and ventilator passes
POST, BUV is exited. There is no ac alarm when POST is run at
this time. This is the only situation where it is unnecessary to run
EST to get out of BUV.
+5 V power supply output out +5 V power supply output outside range of +4.775 and +5.225 V
of range for prolonged period.
Bus timeout Problems with bus activity for prolonged period.
Intentional BUV RUN EST Ventilator was placed into BUV by turning ventilator off, then on,
DO NOT USE while it was running EST.
Triggering BUV. BUV is triggered either under CPU control via the SET/ signal (Figure 2-60)
or INIT/ signal (see preceding subsection on initialization).
The SET/ signal is generated when the CPU detects any of these conditions:
• Three system errors within 24 hours operating time
• A POST failure
• A fault during its normal processing
• Low ac power
• Intentional BUV (turning ventilator off during EST)
To generate the SET/ signal, the CPU writes to a memory location in the BUV control section
on the conversion PCB. (If for some reason the CPU cannot write to this location, then it will
be unable to strobe the watchdog timer also, and a watchdog timeout will occur.) As a result,
the SET/ signal (IDO13/) is sent to the BUV circuit on the interface PCB, starting BUV at once.
8088-3
Figure 2-60. Back-up Ventilation
The BUV can also be invoked via the INIT/ signal. When the INIT/ signal goes active, the
INIT/ signal is sent to the interface PCB, where the INIT/ signal starts a 10-second timer in the
BUV. During this 10-second interval, the CPU executes POST. If POST does not pass, BUV
assumes control of the ventilator.
If the +12 V input to the PCB is low, however, this BUV timer will not be allowed to start,
because a reliable +12 V supply is crucial to BUV. Instead, the ventilator will go into safety
valve open mode (see subsequent subsection).
Manifestations of BUV (Figure 2-60). After BUV is initialized, a timer internal to the BUV
circuitry on the interface PCB outputs a signal (CLK), which controls the time of the
exhalation and inspiration periods. The BUV outputs a BUV signal, which is used to control
pneumatic components involved in BUV. If the patient pressure is determined to be greater
than 30 cmH2O above PEEP, BUV outputs the high inspiratory pressure (HIP) signal.
Some of the effects of BUV assuming control are:
• Alarm sounded. The BUV signal is output from the interface PCB to the conversion PCB as
IDI7 (BUV STAT). Here it turns on the alarm.
• BACK UP VENTILATOR indicator lit. The BUV signal, output from the interface PCB as
BUV LAMP, turns on the BACK UP VENTILATOR indicator on the front panel display PCB.
• Mandatory breaths with fixed parameters delivered. Only mandatory breaths are given, using
these default ventilator settings: TIDAL VOLUME -0.5 liter, RESPIRATORY RATE -12 bpm,
PEAK FLOW -45 lpm, O2% -100 (if oxygen is not available, 21% O2 is used). Breath timing is
determined by timing circuits in the BUV. Tidal volume is determined by BUV volume
potentiometers (R85 and R86), which supply the PSOLs with analog inputs.
• Patient system pressure limited. If patient pressure is 30 cmH2O above PEEP, BUV pressure
switch PS4 is opened, resulting in patient system pressure being limited to 30 cmH2O above
PEEP. This is accomplished by disabling the PSOLs and energizing the exhalation pilot control
solenoid, SOL4.
• PEEP/CPAP active. PEEP/CPAP remains active, but the level is not displayed.
• Keyboard and controls deactivated: Ventilator controls, including the <EST> button, are
inactive.
• Displays blanked. All displays, except the 20-character display, are blanked.
• A/D and D/A conversion inhibited. This is accomplished by clearing all DACs, disabling the A/
DC multiplexer on the interface PCB, and resetting a counter in the
A/DC.
• Solenoids, the compressor, and the battery charger are placed into a safe state.
Because software cannot control the pneumatics during BUV, circuitry is provided on the
interface PCB to duplicate some of the decisions about pneumatic control that would
otherwise be made by the software. Some of these decisions are:
• Safety valve. The safety valve opens if source gases are not available.
• Cross-over solenoid SOL3. If source oxygen (sensed by PS1) is available, SOL3 is energized,
permitting oxygen to operate the safety valve/check valve system and the PEEP/CPAP system.
• Exhalation pilot control solenoid SOL4. During inspiration, SOL4 is energized, providing
exhalation valve pilot pressure from the output of PSOL1 and PSOL2. When de-energized during
exhalation, the valve uses PEEP as its pilot source.
• Safety valve solenoid SOL5 and PEEP/CPAP solenoid SOL7. As long as oxygen
pressure switch PS1, air pressure switch PS2, or compressor pressure switch PS3 senses
adequate source gas pressure, SOL5 is energized, piloting the safety valve/check valve
closed. SOL7 is also energized, supplying gas to PEEP/CPAP regulator REG5 so PEEP is
available.
• Proportional solenoid valves PSOL1 and PSOL2. The BUV on the interface PCB
supplies the analog multiplexer signals to determine the analog input to PSOL1 and
PSOL2. The selection of analog inputs is based on such variables as whether or not BUV
is active (state of BUV), whether inspiration or expiration is required (state of CLK),
whether patient pressure is less or more than 30 cmH2O (state of HIP), and whether
any of pressure switches PS1 through PS3 is actuated.
• Nurse call relay. The nurse call relay is energized, closing the relay contacts.
Exiting BUV. In order for the ventilator to resume normal operation, EST must be run (except
when low ac triggered BUV). During POST, the CPU checks for adequate power to resume
normal ventilation. When the CPU determines power is adequate, it writes to memory
locations on the conversion PCB. The resulting RESET/ (IDO14/) signal is optically isolated,
then sent to the interface PCB, where it turns off BUV.
2.4.3.6 Safety Valve Open (Figure 2-61)

When the ventilator’s CPU determines the ventilator cannot properly ventilate the patient,
the CPU invokes the Safety Valve Open (SVO) state. This safety feature is invoked under the
following conditions. Table 2-4 helps you interpret the cause of the SVO condition based on
alarm indications.
Table 2-4: Safety Valve Open Causes and Indications
Audio 20-character
Type of failure Lamps Cause
alarm display
Fault Yes VENTILATOR 99xx Faulty PSOL or flow sensor resulted in software
detected INOPERATIVE, DO NOT USE declaring a fault. The ventilator goes into SVO
SAFETY VALVE when the ventilator is turned off, then on.
OPEN
Pneumatic Yes SAFETY VALVE SVO DUE TO LSP Ongoing software checks found PS1 open (less
source OPEN than 35 psi oxygen), PS2 open (less than 35 psi
pressure loss air), and PS3 open (less than 7.5 psi)
Sustained ac Yes SAFETY VALVE LOW AC POWER Monitored ac power dropped below trip point
power failure OPEN (if possible) (if possible) or for prolonged period. Ventilator runs POST and
or blank blank goes into SVO. If power fail condition continues,
ventilator stays in SVO, never going into BUV.
+12 V supply Yes SAFETY VALVE +12 V supply output falls below +10.7 V, as
loss OPEN monitored by +12 V monitoring circuit on
interface PCB. (All solenoids except SOL6 and
SOL8 are operated by +12 V.)
POST execution Normally SAFETY VALVE POWER-ON When POST is run, it puts the ventilator into SVO
not OPEN SELF-TEST until it verifies that power levels are acceptable.
Regardless of the event that triggers SVO, safety valve solenoid SOL5 and PEEP/CPAP solenoid
SOL7 are de-energized (opened), and the pilot pressure and mix exit pressures are reduced to
zero. This allows the patient to breathe room air unassisted by the ventilator through the
opened safety valve. It is necessary that SOL7 is opened, preventing PEEP or CPAP, which
could increase work of breathing. Check valves CV3 and CV5 ensure that the patient does not
rebreathe exhaled gases.
0 - 120 cmH2O 0 - 120 cmH2O

0 - 180 lpm 0 - 180 lpm
P1
ABSOLUTE
SOL PRESSURE
1 P2
TRANSDUCER
P2
O2 R5
P2 INLET
NEBULIZER DAMPING
SAFETY/CHECK
VALVE
VENT MANIFOLD
EXHALATION
PILOT 60 cmH2O
PRESSURE SV
SOL nominal
2 NETWORK OUT
R7
CV6
AIR
IN
SOL5 SAFETY
NEBULIZER CV7 VALVE SOLENOID SAFETY VALVE
REGULATOR
R2 SAFETY VALVE
PILOT RESTRICTOR
R6
SAFETY VALVE REG 4
PILOT RESTRICTOR
2-00284
Figure 2-61. Safety Valve Open Operation
2.4.3.7 Wall Air-to-Compressor Switchover (Figure 2-62)

When an external air source is available, cross-over solenoid SOL3 is typically de-energized,
the pneumatics are powered by wall air, and a mixture of air and oxygen is delivered to the
patient. (In BUV, SOL3 is energized; this discussion does not apply to BUV. See preceding
discussion on BUV operation.)
When wall air pressure is lost, as sensed by PS2, SOL3 is energized. As a result, pure oxygen
flows through SOL3 to the pneumatics (PEEP control and relief valve control system).
Provided compressor pressure switch PS3 senses adequate pressure, a signal is sent to start the
compressor motor. After the compressor output reaches 10 psig (68.95 kPa) nominal, SOL3 is
de-energized and the ventilator again operates on a mixture of oxygen and air.
2.4.3.8 Apnea Ventilation

The ventilator invokes an emergency ventilation mode called apnea ventilation if an
exhalation is not detected within the operator-selected apnea interval, provided the low
inspiration alarm is not active. Apnea parameters are stored in battery-backed RAM and they
default to BUV parameters. Apnea parameters are also used for disconnect ventilation.
During apnea ventilation, there is an audio alarm and visual alarm (red ALARM indicator,
flashing APNEA LED, and [APNEA VENTILATION] displayed by the 20-character display).
<ALARM RESET> and <ALARM SILENCE> are the only keys that operate during apnea
ventilation. After the condition that caused disconnect ventilation is corrected, press
<ALARM RESET> to restore the ventilator to its pre-alarm state. Normal ventilation also
begins when the patient initiates two consecutive breaths, each of which returns 50% of the
delivered tidal volume.
2.4.3.9 Disconnect Ventilation
The ventilator invokes an emergency ventilation mode called disconnect ventilation when it
detects inconsistencies between airway pressure, PEEP, and the gas delivery pressure in the
pneumatic system. These may be caused by disconnected or plugged tubing. The ventilator
monitors for occlusions, because an occlusion could greatly increase the patient’s work of
breathing.
When the ventilator enters disconnect ventilation, the ventilator delivers mandatory breaths
with the same parameters as for apnea ventilation (default parameters are the same as BUV
parameters). Sensitivity is not recognized during disconnect ventilation.
During disconnect ventilation, there is an audio alarm and visual alarm (red ALARM
indicator, HIGH PRESSURE LIMIT LED, and [AIRWAY PRESS DISCONN] displayed by the
20-character display).
<ALARM RESET> and <ALARM SILENCE> are the only keys that operate during disconnect
ventilation. After the condition that caused disconnect ventilation is corrected, press
<ALARM RESET> to restore the ventilator to its pre-alarm state.
35 - 100 psig 10 psig nominal

0 - 180 lpm 1 - 180 lpm
O2 REGULATOR
REG 1

F2 O2 TEMPERATURE
CV1 FILTER F11
CROSS-OVER SOLENOID
50 PSI O2
O2 PRESSURE VENT
SWITCH NC C SILENCER
O2 WATER PS1 AIR
TRAP AND REGULATOR
FILTER F1 REG 2
NO
AIR AIR FLOW AND
CV2 FILTER F10
50 PSI AIR F7
AIR PRESSURE
SWITCH PILOT
TRAP AND OUTLET
FILTER F3 FILTER
2-00285
<35 psig
Wall Air Lost
Figure 2-62. Wall Air-to-Compressor Switchover (Sheet 1 of 2)
10 psig nominal
35 – 100 psig 0 – 180 lpm
0 – 180 lpm
O2 REGULATOR
REG 1

F2 O2 TEMPERATURE
CV1 FILTER F11
CROSS-OVER SOLENOID
50 PSI O2
O2 PRESSURE VENT
SWITCH NC C SILENCER PROPORTIONAL
O2 WATER PS1 AIR SOLENOID
FILTER F1 REG 2 ASSEMBLY
NO
AIR AIR FLOW AND
CV2 FILTER F10
50 PSI AIR F7
AIR PRESSURE
SWITCH PILOT
TRAP AND OUTLET
FILTER F3 FILTER
COMPRESSOR PRESSURE
SWITCH PS3
CV4 ADJUSTABLE
COMPRESSOR NO RESTRICTOR
CHECK VALVE R3
<35 psig
COMPRESSOR IN OUT
BACK
PRESSURE SOL7
REGULATOR PEEP/CPAP
PEEP/ REGULATOR
CPAP
SOLENOID
COMPRESSOR
UNLOADING
SOLENOID REG 3
HEAT
EXCHANGER
OUTLET INLET
FILTER FILTER
INLET
SILENCER
COMPRESSOR/PEDESTAL
2-00286
Compressor Start Up
Figure 2-62. Wall Air-to-Compressor Switchover (Sheet 2 of 2)
SECTION
S E C T IO N
Installation and Assembly 3 3

This section describes how to install accessories on and assemble the 7200 Series Ventilator
after it is unpacked.
The procedures required to assemble any separately packaged accessories can be found in the
appropriate operator’s or service manual.
NOTE:
If unpacking is required, reverse repacking procedures in Section 21 to unpack the ventilator
and its accessories.
3.1 Ventilator DIP Switches

DIP switches in the ventilator must be set appropriately so the ventilator can communicate
with external devices. These switches are located on the DCI-display controller PCB
(80188-based units) or memory PCB (8088-based units).
3.1.1 Checking DIP Switch Settings
NOTE:
Each DIP switch block consists of a block of eight small on/off toggle switches. Always check
settings, as the settings may have been inadvertently changed during PCB removal or
handling.
Follow these instructions to check the DIP switch settings in a ventilator with or without the
DCI option.
In Ventilator with DCI Option

If the ventilator has the DCI option, verify that the DIP switch settings are correct by entering
Function 22, as indicated in Table 3-1 and Table 3-2. Function 22 displays the configurations
of the HOST (or DIGITAL OUTPUT) and PRINTER/HOST2 (or PRINTER) ports. Interpret the
switch setting information, referring to Figure 3-1.
If the DIP switch settings are incorrect, change them, as described in Section 3.1.2.
In Ventilator without DCI Option

If the ventilator does not have the DCI option, check the DIP switch settings by accessing the
card cage, locating the DIP switches (Figure 3-2), and then comparing their settings to the
chart in Figure 3-3. Change the DIP switch settings as required, referring to Section
Section 3.1.2.
NOTE:
The DIP switches occupy approximately the same positions on the memory PCB as they do
on the DCI-display controller PCB. For another view of these switches, see the photographs
in Figure 14-9 and Figure 14-10.
Table 3-1: Checking DIP Switch Settings (DCI 2.0 Installed)
Operator Action Message Window Response Comments
1. Select Function 22. 22 COM CONTROL PRNTR Either message may be displayed, depending on
or whether the PRINTER/HOST2 port is selected as
22 COM CONTROL HOST2 a printer or computer port.
2. Press <CLEAR> to change the SELECT HOST2 -ENTER Press <ENTER> to select the configuration, or
current configuration. or <CLEAR> to toggle. If you select HOST2 and the
SELECT PRINTER -ENTER patient data log (Function 23) was on, the
message [DATA LOG OFF] is displayed for 2
seconds.
3. Press <ENTER> to view the PRNTR xx xx xx Pressing <ENTER> toggles between the PRNTR/
current configuration. or HOST2 and HOST configurations.
HOST2 xx xx x xx xx See Figure 3-1 for configuration message
definitions.
4. Press <ENTER> to view the HOST xx xx x xx xx Pressing <ENTER> toggles between the PRNTR/
HOST (not HOST2) port’s HOST2 and HOST configuration.
configuration. See Figure 3-1 for configuration message
definitions.
Table 3-2: Checking DIP Switch Settings (DCI 1.0 Installed)
Operator Action Message Window Response Comments
1. Select Function 22. 22 COM CONTROL PRNTR
2. Press <ENTER> to view one PRINTR xx xx xx Pressing <ENTER> toggles between the printer
configuration. and host (computer) configurations.
See Figure 3-1 for configuration message
definitions.
3. Press <ENTER> to view the HOST xx xx x xx xx Pressing <ENTER> toggles between the host
other configuration. or (computer) and printer configurations.
COMPTR xx xx x xx xx See Figure 3-1 for configuration message
definitions.
Installation and Assembly 3
[PRNTR 12 OE 7]
PRNTR 12 O E 7
Printer port Odd parity. 7 data bits

is selected. per byte.
1200 baud. Other baud rates

are 300 (03), 4800 (48), and Parity enabled.
9600 (96).
[HOST 96 ED 8 03 15]
HOST 96 E D 8 03 15
Values displayed 8 data bits Device address 15 is operator-

apply to the HOST Even parity. selectable and ranges from
per byte.
port. 0 to 15 (User-definted).
9600 baud. Other baud rates 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07

are 300 (03), 1200 (12), and Parity disabled. 7202 Display
4800 (48). Printer
Enhanced-Plus
Keyboard 2-00287
Figure 3-1. Configuration Message Definitions (Ventilators with DCI Option)
S1
S2
S3
2-00056
Card Cage in 80188-Based Unit

(viewed from front)
Figure 3-2. Location of DIP Switches
3.1.2 Setting DIP Switches
NOTE:
Always set the DIP switches with the ventilator power off, as the ventilator software checks
the DIP switch settings only immediately after power is turned on. Setting changes made
while the ventilator power is on will not be recognized until the ventilator power is turned
off and back on.
Set the DIP switches on the DCI-display controller or memory PCB as follows.
1. Access card cage by removing ventilator top panel and top cover (Section 19.1) and card
cage cover, if applicable.
2. Locate DIP switch blocks S1, S2, and S3, as applicable (Figure 3-2).
3. Change DIP switch settings by pressing in top portion of toggle switch for on or bottom
portion for off (Figure 3-3).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S1 (SWITCH
BLOCK 1)
OFF
Ch B Ch B Ch A Ch A
Ch B Parity Parity Ch A Parity Parity
Baud Rate Type On/Off Baud Rate Type On/Off
300 bps Odd Off 300 bps Odd Off
1200 bps Even On 1200 bps Even On
4800 bps 4800 bps
9600 bps 9600 bps
PRINTER port Digital output (host) port

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S2 (SWITCH
BLOCK 2)
OFF
Ch B Ch A Ch B Enhanced-
Data Data Data Plus 7202
Size Size Size Keyboard Printer Display
(PRINTER) (HOST2)
7 bits 7 bits 7 bits Enabled Enabled Enabled
8 bits 8 bits 8 bits Disabled Disabled Disabled
Puritan-Bennett Data Transmission Protocol
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
S3 (SWITCH
BLOCK 3)
OFF
Ch B Ch B
Ch B Parity Parity
Baud Rate Type On/Off Computer Device Address
(user-defined)
300 bps Odd Off
1200 bps Even On
4800 bps
= Pressed in 9600 bps
(HOST2 used only in units with DCI 2.0 when 2-00362

PRINTER/HOST2 port set accordingly)
Figure 3-3. DIP Switch Settings
3.2 Installing 7202 Display

Warning
Never connect or disconnect the 7202 Display from the ventilator while the ventilator is
operating. If the ventilator is not turned off, a momentary loss of power to the pneumatic
assembly could initiate back-up ventilation. Damage to the display module is also possible.
Install the 7202 Display as follows.

1. Make sure the ventilator has a communications port in the third space on the back
panel bracket (Figure 3-5).
2. Mount the 7202 Display in one of the two threaded openings on the ventilator front
panel (Figure 3-4).
3. Attach free end of display cable to the 15-pin DISPLAY port on the ventilator back panel
(Figure 3-5).
2-00288
Figure 3-4. Installing 7202 Display
Display
port
Display
cable
Display
port
Seven-connector
Display back panel
cable
2-00060
Three-connector
back panel
Figure 3-5. Connecting 7202 Display Cable
For details on how the 7202 display operates and how to service the 7202 display, refer to
Section 20.
3.3 Installing Remote Nurse Call

Warning
• The nurse call relay does not signal loss of power. Patients on life-support equipment
should be visually monitored by competent medical personnel, since life-threatening
circumstances may arise that may not activate alarms.
• Maximum total system leakage current to chassis ground, when measured at the
ventilator, must be in accordance with values in the electrical safety test of the
performance verification (Section 7).
If desired, connect a remote nurse call device to the ventilator as follows, referring to
Figure 3-6.
1. Construct a nurse call interface cable. Configure the interface cable with a standard 9-pin,
D-type, subminiature male connector and a standard screwlock backshell with jack screws
on one end and a suitable mating connector for your application on the other end.
2. Interface the nurse call to the ventilator’s analog output connector, located on ventilator
utility panel, using cable described in step 1.
3. Furnish an external power source to operate the nurse call. Power is connected to pin 8 of
the analog output connector.
5 4 3 2 1
2-00289
9 8 7 6
Pin Number Description of Signal
Connector shell Chassis ground: Do not use to connect protective shield to chassis ground. The
protective shield must be connected to chassis ground on pin 1.
1 Chassis ground: To be used for protective shield only. The protective shield must
also be connected to chassis ground on the peripheral equipment.
2 Pressure signal: 0 to +10 V, corresponding to -20 cmH2O to + 120 cmH2O.

0 cmH2O equals approximately 1.4 V. Required impedance matching is 1 KΩ
minimum.
3 Pressure signal return
4 --
5 --
6 Flow signal: 0 to +10 V, corresponding to -180 lpm to +180 lpm. 0 lpm equals
+5.0 V. Required impedance matching is 1 KΩ minimum.
7 Flow signal return
8 Nurse call relay: Normally open; closed when activated. Allowable current is 250
mA at +30 V (maximum).
9 Nurse call relay return
NOTE:
When using a 7250 and cable (P/N 4-023259-00), only pins 8 and 9 are available.
Figure 3-6. Analog Output Pinout
3.4 Installing Pulse Oximetry Extension Cable

If the ventilator has the Pulse Oximetry option, install the pulse oximetry extension cable as
follows, referring to Figure 3-7.
1. Install three cable retainers on ventilator guardrail as shown.
2. Connect pulse oximetry extension cable to PULSE OXIMETRY port on back of ventilator.
3. Connect Pulse Oximetry probe with cord to Pulse Oximetry cable.
Extension cable
Probe
2-00363
Extension cable
4-026668-00
Cable retainer
(3 required)
4-026669-00
Figure 3-7. Installing Pulse Oximetry Cable
3.5 Installing Printer

You can connect a serial printer that is Epson FX-85 compatible to the 7200 Series Ventilator
or the 7250 Metabolic Monitor. See Table 1-2 for printer compatibility requirements. Follow
these instructions to install a printer for use with the ventilator or monitor.
1. Refer to Figure 3-3 and the printer’s operations manual for an RS-232C communications
protocol.
2. Connect null modem cable to ventilator’s PRINTER or PRINTER/HOST2 port.
NOTE:
• If the printer is to be connected to the ventilator’s PRINTER/HOST2 port, make sure the
port is configured for printer operation (through function 22).
• For Thinkjet printer users: Earlier model ventilators worked with the settings shown in
Figure 3-3. Later models and models with upgraded software may require that mode
switch 1 be set to off prior to turning on the printer. (This prevents insertion of unwanted
blank lines in the printout.)
3.6 Assembling Ventilator Cart
NOTE:
To install a cart or a cart drawer as an upgrade to a ventilator, follow the instructions
supplied with the ventilator cart kit.
A ventilator ordered with a cart is shipped from the factory with the cart installed. A pair of
hose management brackets, however, must be installed on the cart.
Install each bracket by positioning its guide studs into the slot and tightening the screw into
the ventilator cart clip-nut.
3.7 Installing Flex Arm

Install the flex arm as follows, referring to Figure 3-8.
1. Locate threaded mounting hole in the left and right front corners on top of the ventilator.
2. Determine the appropriate location for arm according to your individual requirements.
The arm may also be mounted in the same hole as a 7202 Display, a universal bottle
hanger, or an Oxygen Monitor, as required. Refer to the appropriate operator’s or service
manual for further information.
3. Insert threaded connector on arm into the threaded mounting hole in the ventilator.
4. Tighten wing nut to secure the arm to the ventilator.
Wing nut
Flex arm
Threaded end
of flex arm
Threaded
mounting
hole
2-00292
Figure 3-8. Installing Flex Arm
3.8 Installing Patient System

Refer to the 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual to install exhalation compartment
components, the main flow bacteria filter, the patient pressure water trap and filter (if
applicable), and the patient tubing circuit.
3.9 Connecting Gas Supplies

Warning
Gas supply connections conform to standards set forth in the Diameter Index Safety System
(DISS) for air and oxygen (3/4-16 and 9/16-18, respectively). Do not attempt to change
these connections. Do not use any gases with the ventilator other than air or oxygen.
Caution
• The pore size of the ventilator gas supply filters is 0.3 µm. The small pore size is intended
to protect the ventilator. Do not replace these filters with a filter of larger pore size.
• Always use clean, dry gas sources. The ventilator gas supply filters are not designed to
remove water vapor from wet air. Damage to the ventilator may result if the air or oxygen
supply is particularly wet or dirty. Puritan Bennett recommends you install an external
water trap (P/N 4-019667-00 or equivalent) between the wall gas supplies and the
ventilator.
Connect compressed air and oxygen to the ventilator as follows:

1. Connect the high-pressure air supply hose (black hose connector), packed in the
accessories box, to the ventilator air water trap/filter assembly inlet. Connect other end of
the hose to a clean, dry source of wall air (35 to 100 psig or 241.33 to 689.50 kPa). Securely
tighten all connections.
2. Connect the high-pressure oxygen supply hose (green hose connector), packed in the
accessories box, to the ventilator oxygen water trap/filter assembly inlet. Connect the
other end of hose to a medical-grade, dry source of wall oxygen (35 to 100 psig or 241.33
to 689.50 kPa). Securely tighten all connections.
3.10 Connecting Electrical Power

Warning
When using a ventilator with a compressor pedestal in conjunction with other medical
equipment, be sure that the total electrical load (see Table 1-6) does not exceed the
amperage rating of the branch circuit to which the ventilator is connected. If the maximum
current draw through a branch circuit exceeds the ventilator’s rating, the branch circuit
breaker or fuse will open and the ventilator will initiate a power disconnect alarm.
• The ventilator is equipped with a grounding power plug to protect against
electrical shocks.
• Connect the ventilator power cord and plug directly into a properly grounded receptacle
only.
• Never cut or remove the grounding prong from the power cord or attempt to defeat the
grounding feature.
• Replace the power cord and plug if they are damaged. Using a damaged power cord or
plug may result in an electrical shock hazard.
Caution
Before connecting the ventilator to an external ac power source, check the information on
the data plate, located on the ventilator utility panel. Verify that the ac power is of the
proper voltage and frequency. Serious damage to the ventilator may result if the ac voltage
and frequency do not match those specified on the data plate.
1. Uncoil ventilator power cord from around its hanger on the face of the utility panel, and
plug it into a grounded power outlet.
NOTE:
• Whenever battery power has been interrupted, reset ventilator clock.
3.11 Installation Checkout
Test the ventilator for proper operation after installation and assembly, as follows. If
ventilator fails to perform during installation checkout, refer to Section 7, “Performance
Verification.”
1. Install the test lung, packed in the accessories box, on the patient circuit wye.
2. Turn on the ventilator using the power switch on the utility panel. The ventilator
automatically initiates the Power-On Self-Test (POST) (Section 5). If POST does not pass,
make any necessary repairs before proceeding.
3. Perform the total leakage current test (Section 7.6.1). Make any necessary repairs before
proceeding.
4. Perform the lamp test (Section 7.6.5). Make any necessary repairs before proceeding.
5. Perform the Extended Self-Test (EST) (Section 5). Make any necessary repairs or
adjustments before proceeding.
6. Perform checkout procedures for individual accessories (refer to operator’s or service
manuals for instructions).
3.12 Preparing for Patient Use

Before the ventilator is connected to a patient, perform these procedures:
1. Perform all daily periodic maintenance procedures (refer to the 7200 Series Operator’s
Manual and Table 4-1).
2. Perform all daily or patient-related cleaning and sterilization procedures (refer to the 7200
Series Operator’s Manual).
3. Perform all pre-operational procedures (refer to the 7200 Series Operator’s Manual). Correct
any discrepancies before proceeding.
SECTION
S E C T IO N
Periodic Maintenance 4 4
This section includes a schedule of periodic maintenance for the 7200 Series Ventilator and
patient system. It also describes how to perform periodic maintenance activities required for
the ventilator and patient system. These activities should be adapted to your institution’s
policies and protocols.
4.1 Periodic Maintenance Details

This section details periodic maintenance activities required for the ventilator and patient
system. Table 4-1 summarizes these procedures. Refer to the elapsed time meters located on
the back of the ventilator unit and the compressor compartment (Figure 4-1) for total hours
of operation.
Table 4-1: Schedule of Periodic Maintenance

Frequency Required Component Maintenance
Daily All bacteria filters within patient system Ensure that ventilator functions normally with filters in
place. Monitor performance of disposable filters and
replace as needed.
NOTE:
Monitor exhalation filter more frequently if
nebulized medication is being used, as a buildup of
nebulized medication can occlude filter media.
Exhaled gas collector vial, oxygen and Check and empty, as required, every shift.
air supply water traps and filters
Between patients All bacteria filters within patient system Check pressure drop across reusable filters, and ensure
(or every 15 days, at a that it does not exceed safe limits.
minimum)
Every 250 hours Compressor compartment cooling fan Clean.

filter, electronics compartment cooling
fan filter. NOTE:
Clean the fan filters more often than every 250
hours if necessary (Some environments cause lint
and dust to collect more quickly).
Every 2,500 hours Entire ventilator Perform volume calibration if a 7250 Metabolic Monitor is
being used with ventilator (see 7250 Metabolic Monitor
Operator’s Manual).
Various components Use 2,500-hour preventive maintenance kits.
Every 10,000 hours Various components Use 10,000-hour preventive maintenance kits.
Annually All bacteria filters within patient system Replace and destroy reusable filters.
(reusable filters only)
Also consult the equipment control (E/C) record label and the warranty label (Figure 4-1),
which may be affixed to the ventilator. These labels provide information about the dates and
elapsed hours at the time of ventilator services.
E/C record label
Warranty label
Ventilator ETM
PMR label
Compressor ETM
(access through
compressor compartment)
2-00042
Figure 4-1. Elapsed Time Meter (ETM) Locations
4.1.1 Daily: Gas Supply Water Traps and Filters (Air and Oxygen)
Visually inspect each trap and filter for buildup of condensate or particles during each shift
(or as often as is appropriate, based on previous experience). To purge condensate, press or
loosen the drain valve at the bottom of the trap.
To clean the water trap, wash it in a mild solution of soap and water, rinse well, and dry. For
water trap with plastic head and spring-type drain, install a new filter element whenever the
bowl is removed (see Figure 10-5).
Periodic Maintenance 4
Caution
Evidence of white or green residue may indicate a contaminated wall air system.
4.1.2 Daily: Exhaled Gas Collector Vial

Inspect the collector vial frequently when the ventilator is operating to ensure that an
excessive amount of condensate has not accumulated. Empty the vial by removing it.
4.1.3 Between Patients (or Every 15 Days, at a Minimum): Bacteria Filters in

Patient System
Inspect the main flow, exhalation, nebulizer, and patient pressure bacteria filters between
patients (or every 15 days, at a minimum); and check the pressure drop across the filters.
(Figure 4-2 and Figure 4-3 show ways to check the pressure drop.) Replace any filter that fails
the pressure drop test, is cracked, rattles, or has a broken case.
NOTE:
Monitor exhalation filter more frequently if nebulized medication is being used. Buildup of
nebulized medication can occlude filter media.
Ventilator Settings:
Mode: CMV
Waveform: Square
Tidal Volume: 2.5 L
Peak inspiratory flow: 100 lpm
Pressure drop not greater Pressure drop not greater

than 4 cmH2O than 4 cmH2O
Free,
Ventilator unobstructed Ventilator
outlet outlet outlet
Free,
unobstructed
PATIENT outlet
PRESSURE
connector
Pressure gauge
2-00366
a.On Any Ventilator b.On Any Ventilator Excluding Those with Internal
Exhalation Valves in Bottom-Loading Compartments
Figure 4-2. Checking Resistance of Main Flow or Exhalation Bacteria Filter Using Ventilator
Acceptable pressure drop:

Nebulizer/patient pressure filters:
<23 cmH2O (0.33 psi) at 10 lpm flow
Main flow or exhalation filters:
<4 cmH2O
Air source
2-00043
Pressure regulator Filter Flow meter
Figure 4-3. Checking Resistance of Bacteria Filter Using Metered Air Source
4.1.4 Every 250 Hours: Cooling Fan Filter

Clean the electronics compartment cooling fan filter every 250 hours of ventilator operation.
Clean the compressor cooling fan filter (if the ventilator has a compressor) every 250 hours of
compressor operation. See Figure 4-4 through Figure 4-6 to remove the filters. Vacuuming
may be substituted for cleaning the ventilator and compressor fan filters.
Wash each brass inlet and each fan filter in a mild solution of soap and water, rinse well, and
dry, to ensure an unrestricted flow of air through the compartments. Replacing may be
substituted for cleaning the brass inlet filters.
NOTE:
Clean the fan filters more often than every 250 hours if necessary (some environments cause
a quicker collection of lint and dust.) It may be necessary to clean the compressor filter more
often due to its tendency to collect lint.
4.1.5 Every 2,500 Hours: Volume Calibration

If you are using a 7250 Metabolic Monitor with the ventilator, perform a volume calibration
every 2,500 hours of ventilator operation (see the 7250 Metabolic Monitor Operator’s Manual).
4.1.6 Every 2,500 and 10,000 Hours: Preventive Maintenance

Puritan Bennett recommends that preventive maintenance be performed every 2,500 and
10,000 hours of service. Table 4-2 lists the kits available for these scheduled maintenance
procedures. For information on kit contents, consult the Parts List.
Lift up
louver panel
and remove
2-00170
Lift up filter
with tab and
remove filter
2-00171
Figure 4-4. Removing Electronics Compartment Cooling Fan Filter (Removable Louver Panel)
Lift filter out
Loosen thumbscrews
holding back panel
Swing side
panel out
2-00172
Figure 4-5. Removing Electronics Compartment Cooling Fan (One-Piece Left-Hand Panel)
Slide
filter out Remove outer
back cover
2-00041
Figure 4-6. Removing Compressor Compartment Cooling Fan Filter
Table 4-2: Preventive Maintenance Kits
Preventive Maintenance for: Hours of Service Kit Part Number
Ventilator, all voltages and frequencies (units with 2,500 4-020271-00

Enhanced-Plus or enhanced keyboards)
Ventilator, all voltages and frequencies (units with basic 4-020291-00
keyboards)
Compressor compartment, all voltages and frequencies 2,500 4-020292-00
Ventilator, 115 V, 60 Hz 10,000 4-020790-00

Ventilator, 100 V, 50/60 Hz 4-020803-00
Ventilator, 220/240 V, 50/60 Hz 4-020804-00
Compressor compartment, 115 V, 60 Hz 10,000 4-020791-00

Compressor compartment, 100 V, 50 Hz 4-020798-00
Compressor compartment, 220/240 V, 50 Hz 4-020801-00
4.1.7 Annually: Reusable Bacteria Filters

Replace the reusable bacteria filters; nebulizer, patient pressure, main flow and exhalation,
after one year of service, regardless of their apparent condition. (For disposable and
single-patient use filters, follow manufacturer’s recommendations.)
4.2 Cleaning and Sterilization

For detailed information on cleaning and sterilizing patient system parts, consult the 7200
Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual. Table 4-3 summarizes these cleaning and
sterilization activities, both for patient system parts and for ventilator surfaces.
Table 4-3: Cleaning and Sterilizing of Ventilator Parts and Surfaces
Part Recommended Action Cautions
Ventilator exterior, front Wipe clean with a damp cloth Do not use liquid bactericide. Do not allow moisture to seep
panel, and console and mild detergent. between keyboard panel and console cover.
cover
Air/oxygen water trap/ Disassemble and clean. Dry with Do not sterilize water trap/filter assemblies. Whenever you
filter assemblies compressed air. disassemble later-style water trap/filter assemblies, always
replace filter elements F1 or F3 (see Section 4.1.2).
Patient tubing Disassemble and clean. Steam If submersed in liquid during cleaning and sterilizing, blow
autoclave, chemically disinfect, moisture from inside tubing with pressurized air before using.
or expose to ETO gas. Inspect for nicks and cuts. Routine cleaning and sterilization
of exhalation compartment tubing is typically not necessary.
When sterilizing tubing, coil the tubing in a large loop,
avoiding kinks and crossover of tubing on tubing. The lumen
should be free of visible droplets prior to wrapping.
All other outside Wipe clean with alcohol or Do not allow liquid to penetrate ventilator or keyboard
surfaces including flex bactericide. display panel. Do not attempt to sterilize ventilator by
arm exposing to ETO gas.
Accessory equipment Wipe clean with a damp cloth Consult appropriate operator’s manual for details.
surfaces and mild detergent.
Nebulizer Disassemble and clean. Then Ensure that nebulizer jet passages are cleaned with the jet
steam autoclave, chemically cleaning rod provided with the nebulizer.
disinfect, or expose to ETO gas.
In-line water traps Disassemble and clean. Then Check for cracks.
steam autoclave, chemically
disinfect, or expose to ETO gas.
Couplings and Steam autoclave or chemically If submersed in liquid during cleaning and sterilizing, blow
connectors disinfect. moisture from inside with pressurized air before using.
Inspect for nicks and cuts.
Collector vial Clean and steam autoclave, Check for cracks.

chemically disinfect, or expose
to ETO gas.
Bacteria filters Steam autoclave reusable filters. Do not chemically disinfect or expose to ETO gas. Check
Discard disposable or resistance of filter before reusing (see Figure 4-2 and Figure
single-patient use filters. 4-3).
Patient pressure water Clean and chemically disinfect, Do not steam autoclave.
trap (conventional or expose to ETO gas.
patient system only)
Manifold junction Disassemble and clean. Then Cap passageway to diaphragm before submersing manifold
assembly (conventional steam autoclave, chemically assembly in water.
patient system only) disinfect, or expose to ETO gas.
Table 4-3: Cleaning and Sterilizing of Ventilator Parts and Surfaces (continued)
Part Recommended Action Cautions
Flex tube/check valve Clean and steam autoclave, Routine cleaning and sterilization of exhalation compartment
assembly (front-loading chemically disinfect, or expose tubing is typically not necessary. Handle check valve carefully.
exhalation to ETO gas.
compartments only)
Exhalation flow sensor Do not clean. Do not attempt to remove the flow sensor and valve. Do not
and internal exhalation flush them with liquids or pressurized air. The only exhalation
valve flow circuit components that typically require cleaning are
the bacteria filter, collector vial, and tee.
SECTION
S E C T IO N
Self-Tests 5 5
Two diagnostic self-test programs reside in the ventilator: the Power-On Self -Test (POST) and
the Extended Self-Test (EST). POST runs automatically each time power is applied to the
ventilator and can detect faults in the electronics. EST, which is run by pressing a button, tests
the hardware.
5.1 Introduction
The 7200 Ventilator self-tests are described in Table 5-1.
Table 5-1: Self-tests
Name Purpose When it is run
Power-on self-test (POST) Verifies the integrity of the Automatically

microcontrollers, power supply, • when power is applied to the
battery, transducers, and motor. ventilator (including after a power
interruption)
• at the start of EST
• after a software watchdog
timeout
Extended self-test (EST) Lets a biomedical technician • when a respiratory therapist is

thoroughly test the operational preparing to connect a new
integrity of the ventilator, both the patient to the ventilator
electronics and pneumatics. POST is a • when a patient tubing system is
part of EST. replaced
• when a service technician
NOTE: troubleshoots the ventilator
The performance verification, • to verify ventilator performance
described in Section 5, is a after servicing
more thorough test of the
ventilator to verify
specifications are met. The
technician runs a partial or full
performance verification after
servicing the ventilator and at
regular intervals.
Ongoing background These checks are performed so as not Automatically, continually, during
checks to disrupt normal operation. Includes ventilation and a smaller number in
these checks: reasonableness of the standby mode
analog inputs, power supply, dc
voltages, pressure transducers, and
more.
5 Self-Tests
Refer to Section 6 for a listing of the POST and EST tests and error codes. Before running the
self-tests, familiarize yourself with the warnings, cautions, and safety instructions in Section 1
and 8.
5.2 Power-On Self-Test (POST)

This section describes POST, including its operation, test routines, and error handling.
5.2.1 Introduction
POST verifies the integrity of the ventilator electrical system. Using POST, it is possible to
quickly detect and isolate most digital and some electronic failures.
5.2.1.1 Structure of POST

POST diagnoses electronic problems using the CPU kernel, located on the CPU PCB. The
kernel includes the microprocessor, an EPROM containing the POST software, and LEDs
(eight in the 80188-based ventilator, three in the 8088-based ventilator). Because each POST
test routine requires successively more operational hardware than the previous one, it
systematically eliminates electronic components as possible causes of ventilator malfunction.
The first test routines check the CPU kernel. The next set of routines tests the CPU PCB. The
last set of test routines checks circuitry off the CPU PCB. The POST routines differ depending
on whether the ventilator has an 80188 or 8088 microprocessor.
5.2.1.2 When Is POST Run

POST starts automatically (1) whenever power is applied to the ventilator, including after a
power interruption; (2) immediately before EST is run; and (3) after a software watchdog
timeout.
5.2.1.3 If POST Fails

If one of the POST routines identifies a failure in a critical ventilator function, the ventilator
activates back-up ventilation (BUV) or the safety valve open (SVO) mode. If a test identifies a
failure in a non-critical function, it may still be possible to run EST while the ventilator is
operating.
5.2.2 Running POST

To run POST for diagnostic purposes, do the following:
1. Expose the card cage. LED indicators should be visible at the upper edge of the CPU PCB
(Figure 5-2 or Figure 5-3).
2. Turn on ventilator power.
3. Observe the LED indicators and the 20-character display. The LED indicators and the
20-character display show codes corresponding to the test being run, as indicated in
Section 6. Some codes may appear in the display and disappear quickly.
4. If a code corresponding to an error condition is continuously displayed by the CPU PCB
LEDs and/or the 20-character display, an error has been detected. The ventilator cannot
resume normal operation until the fault is located and repaired. Refer to Section 6 for
troubleshooting information.
If POST passes, program control is passed to the ventilator applications software.
Self-Tests 5
LEDs
Read from Ventilator Front

2-00367
Figure 5-2. LED Indicators on the 80188 CPU PCB
LEDs Back
Read from Ventilator Back

2-00368
Figure 5-3. LED Indicators on the 8088 CPU PCB
5.2.3 Error Handling

POST reports error information using LED indicators on the CPU PCB and the 20-character
display. Refer to Section 6 for specific error information.
5.2.3.1 How POST Reports Errors

POST reports errors differently depending on which test routine is being executed. When a
kernel test fails, the LEDs on the CPU PCB display the error code. When a later test (a CPU
PCB or offboard test) fails, these LEDs and the 20-character display provide error information.
In any case, the error code is stored in battery-backed RAM, where the six most recent POST
and EST error codes are retained.
In 80188-based ventilators, eight LEDs on the front of the ventilator display error
information. Three LEDs on the left display the test section number, and five right-hand LEDs
display the binary test code, as follows:
5 Self-Tests
Section 1 - CPU kernel
Section 2 - CPU PCB
Section 3 - Offboard and displays
Test Binary
section test code
In 8088-based ventilators, three LEDs display error information, as follows:
0-5 Kernel and CPU PCB tests (no 20-character display)

6 Offboard and display tests (should have 20-character display)
Binary
7 POST passed
test code
If an error is detected during one of the later tests, an error code and message are displayed as
follows:
ERR xxyz
Refer to the tables in Section 6 to interpret these error codes.
5.2.3.2 How the Ventilator Responds to Errors

The ventilator responds to errors according to whether it considers the failure critical (capable
of compromising safe ventilation). Any error code is logged into battery-backed RAM and
activates an audible and a visible alarm.
Critical errors. When the ventilator detects an error that could compromise safe ventilation
(a critical error), POST stops testing and continuously displays the error message, but strobing
of the watchdog timer continues. In addition to sounding the audio alarm, the ventilator
turns on the ALARM light. The ventilator attempts to being BUV, but if that fails, the
ventilator enters the SVO state.
An exception to this is the 80188 CPU PCB test 3 (ac power test). POST waits for a period of
time for ac power to reach an acceptable level. If power levels become acceptable, POST
resumes operation. During a low power condition, the ventilator begins BUV or enters SVO.
Noncritical errors. When the ventilator detects an error that would not compromise safe
ventilation (a noncritical error), POST displays the error message and continues testing. This
message is displayed until the next error is detected or until the end of POST. If only
noncritical errors are detected by POST, the ventilator allows the operator to run EST at the
end of POST. Examples of such errors are the watchdog timer, the battery-backed RAM
checksum, and SPST connection check.
5.3 Extended Self-Test (EST)

This section describes the Extended Self-Test (EST), its operation, test routines, and the
meaning of the error information it conveys. This information applies to Total EST (TEST),
the full set of EST routines, as well as an abbreviated version, Quick EST (QUEST).
5.3.1 Introduction
EST is a set of software routines, which, in conjunction with POST, thoroughly tests the
operational integrity of the ventilator. These routines ensure the integrity of ventilator parts
such as the pneumatics, battery-backed RAM, the back-up ventilator, and the front panel
controls and indicators. EST also calculates the system compliance and the exhalation valve
area ratio and detects possible leaks.
Self-Tests 5
5.3.1.1 When To Run EST
EST was designed to be run by (1) a respiratory therapist before connecting a new patient to
the ventilator or after replacing the patient tubing system, or by (2) a service technician to
troubleshoot the ventilator or to help verify the ventilator’s operation after the ventilator is
serviced. When the <EST> button is pressed to start EST, the ventilator automatically runs
POST first. When POST is completed with no critical errors (see Section 5.2.3.1), the
ventilator runs EST.
By contrast, the performance verification, described in Section 7, is a more thorough test of
the ventilator to verify it meets specifications. The service technician runs parts of or the full
performance verification after servicing the ventilator and at regular intervals.
5.3.1.2 Hardware Requirements

• High-pressure air (either an external source or the compressor) and oxygen
• Leak-tight patient tubing circuit
• No. 2 stopper (P/N 4-009523-00)
5.3.1.3 What If EST Fails

If an EST test fails, you may still continue EST execution, although EST will not pass until the
error conditions are corrected. It may be useful to complete EST even with errors, because
information on multiple errors can facilitate troubleshooting.
If EST fails, Puritan Bennett recommends that the ventilator be repaired before it is returned
to service. The ventilator has a limited capability to override EST errors and resume normal
operation.
Warning
Do not use a ventilator that has failed EST without verifying its operational integrity by
means other than EST and determining that the patient will not be placed at risk.
5 Self-Tests
5.3.1.4 Quick EST (QUEST)

Quick EST is an abbreviated version of EST, designed to be run when only the patient tubing
system is being replaced. Quick EST, which tests the ventilator in approximately 1-1/2
minutes, runs six tests that ensure that the new patient service system is connected and
matched to the ventilator. These tests are as follows:
Test Function
52 Autozeroes pressure transducers

53 Ensures that patient is disconnected
54 Tests for leaks
55, step 7 Autozeroes proportional solenoid valves (PSOL1 and PSOL2)
57, step 2 Calculates compliance
58 Calculates area ratio
5.3.2 Starting EST
Warning
Never press the EST button while a patient is connected to the ventilator.
1. Press the <EST> button on the utility panel (Figure 5-4), holding it for 1 to 2 seconds.
Prompts requiring your response will be displayed by the 20-character display.
NOTE:
• Before you initiate EST, if the ventilator is registering an alarm condition, press <ALARM
RESET>. Alarm handling has the highest priority of ventilator tasks.
• To cancel an EST request after the <EST> button is pressed but before test routine
execution begins, press <ALARM RESET>, <CLEAR>, or any ventilator setting or status key.
• If ventilator is a 7200ae and a 7250 Metabolic Monitor is installed—for the ventilator to
enter metabolic mode, Volume Calibration must be accomplished. Refer to the 7250
Metabolic Monitor Service Manual, Section 3, Service Function 5.
• Calibration data is stored in the ventilator’s battery-backed RAM. If connector J11 has
been disconnected during service, volume calibration must be performed.
Self-Tests 5
EST button
EST
2-00014
Figure 5-4. Location of EST Button

2. Respond to the following 20-character display prompts by pressing the keys indicated. If
you do not respond to one of the following prompts within the allotted time, the EST
request will be canceled.
Prompt Response
START EST-ENTER Make sure the patient is disconnected from the ventilator and the
wye is blocked. Press <ENTER>.
PAT TUBING OFF-ENTER Press <ENTER> if patient is disconnected and wye is blocked.
QUICK EST Respond as follows:
• Run Quick EST by pressing <ENTER>.
• Run Total EST or perform other EST fuctions by pressing <++>.
TOTAL EST Respond as follows:
(displayed only if Total EST • Run Total EST by pressing <ENTER>.
selected)
NOTE:
Puritan Bennett recommends you make a practice of
reviewing error codes and other data from the most recent
EST run before continuing with EST.
• Review the six most recent error codes by pressing the

numbers <1> through <6> (see Section 5.3.9).
• Clear an error code from memory by pressing a number
between <1> and <6>, <LAMP TEST>, then <ENTER> (see
Section 5.3.10).
• Review data (other than errors) from the most recent EST
run by pressing <0> (see Section 5.3.8).
If a 7202 Display is present, the error codes and other data from
the most recent EST run are now displayed (Figure 5-5 and
Figure 5-6).
• View the ventilator model, software revision level, and
option code by pressing <I:E RATIO> (see Section 1.3.3).
5 Self-Tests
5.3.3 Running EST Test Routines

The EST routines begin running when the previous prompts are answered. As the ventilator
executes the test routines, it displays the test number, followed by [TESTING]. The EST
routines run sequentially, stopping only to prompt the operator to perform certain actions.
The 7202 Display, if present, lists the tests and their pass/fail status as they are run (see Figure
5-5 and Figure 5-6).
2-00294
Figure 5-5. 7202 Display during Total EST
2-00295
Figure 5-6. 7202 Display during Quick EST
Self-Tests 5
5.3.3.1 Prompts
The ventilator displays the following prompts in the approximate order given after the
previous prompts are answered appropriately. While all these prompts are displayed during
Total EST, only the first four prompts are displayed during Quick EST. Respond to each
prompt as indicated. Failing to respond to a prompt within an allotted time results in the test
failing.
Prompt Response
BLOCK WYE Insert a stopper into the patient wye. Press <ENTER>.
CONNECT O2 Connect the ventilator to the oxygen supply. Press <ENTER>. This prompt is
displayed only if oxygen is not already connected.
SET PEEP = 0 Turn <PEEP/CPAP> control counterclockwise until the PEEP/CPAP or cmH2O
display shows 0.0 cmH2O. Press <ENTER>. This prompt is displayed only if
PEEP is greater than 0 cmH2O.
SET PEEP = xx Turn <PEEP/CPAP> control clockwise to increase PEEP. Observe that the value
in the PEEP/CPAP or cmH2O display equals xx cmH2O. Three short beeps
signal you to turn the knob and a long string of beeps signals you to stop.
NOTE:
Do not turn the knob once the beeping stops and [PLEASE PAUSE] is
displayed, as the measurement is now being calculated. The setting is
now within ±5% range of the desired setting.
UNBLOCK WYE Remove stopper from patient wye.

CONNECT AIR Connect ventilator to external air supply. Verify that ventilator compressor (if
attached) is turned off.
DISCONNECT AIR Disconnect ventilator from external air supply.
DISCONNECT O2 Disconnect ventilator from oxygen supply.
PUSH xxx Press requested key within 10 seconds.
591 NEB ATTACH/ Press <ENTER> if patient tubing circuit includes a nebulizer. Press <CLEAR> to
skip this test if tubing circuit does not have nebulizer.
601 COMPR ATTACH/ Press <ENTER> if ventilator is equipped with a compressor. Press <CLEAR> to
skip this test if ventilator does not have a compressor.
5.3.3.2 Operator Errors

If EST detects an incorrect or delayed entry, it may display one of the following messages.
Respond by making the correction.
Message Cause / Correction
INVALID KEY You responded to a prompt by pressing an incorrect key. Retry key entry.
Pressing an incorrect key twice causes [xxxyz ERR] to be displayed. Repeat
test by pressing < > twice, then <ENTER>.
OPERATOR RESPONSE You did not enter requested information within the allotted time.
TIMED OUT. PLEASE
RESPOND TO THE
PROMPT.
TIME OUT Either you did not enter requested information or the ventilator could not
respond correctly to the action (for example, this message displayed during
PEEP/CPAP level setting may mean the PEEP circuit cannot achieve the
desired PEEP). Repeat test by pressing < > twice, then <ENTER>.
5 Self-Tests
5.3.3.3 Power Loss During EST

If the ventilator is turned off or loses power during EST, [RUN EST-DO NOT USE] is displayed
when power is restored. The ventilator then goes into BUV. The ventilator cannot be used
until EST is rerun and passed or overridden.
5.3.3.4 Displays
EST uses the ventilator displays to display various parameters. Figure 5-8 through Figure 5-10
and Table 5-7 provide information on these EST displays.
Table 5-7: Displays Used in EST Operation
Display Function
Pressure (cmH2O) display Displays pressure measurement of type indicated by LED.
RATE/I:E display Displays area ratio.
PEEP/CPAP cmH2Odisplay Displays PEEP/CPAP pressure measurement.
Volume (liters) display Displays tubing system compliance.
TIDAL VOL liters display Displays BUV oxygen volume (test 614), lift-off current (test 557), or
inspiratory oxygen flow rate.
PEAK FLOW lpm display Displays BUV air volume (test 613), lift-off current (test 557), or
inspiratory air flow rate.
O2% display Displays exhalation flow rate.
Alarm summary display:
NORMAL Indicates EST is running by operator election and that EST has not
detected any error conditions during current run.
CAUTION Indicates one of these conditions:

• A noncritical POST or EST error was detected.
• EST is being rerun after it failed once.
• A test was skipped.
This light is turned off and NORMAL lit if an EST test is failed, then
subsequently passed. The ALARM light is lit if EST fails while CAUTION
is lit.
ALARM EST detected an alarm condition during current run. This light is turned
off and CAUTION is lit if EST is restarted.
20-character display Displays operator prompts, error codes, and other messages.
Self-Tests 5
Displays
VENTILATOR SETTINGS Displays lift-off
PEEP/CPAP
current (test 557),
pressure APNEA
PARAMETERS
AUTO PEEP PRESSURE
SUPPORT
DCI 2.0 RESPIRATORY
MECHANICS
FLOW BY 2.0 GRAPHICS 2.0 PRESSURE
CONTROL
or oxygen volume
or flow
Displays lift-off PATIENT DATA VENTILATOR
STATUS
current (test 557), AIRWAY TIDAL VOL. liters
HIGH PRESSURE
or air volume or PRESSURE
cmH2O
ASSIST
LIMIT
flow SPONTANEOUS
LOW
INSPIRATORY Displays
60 LOW PEEP/CPAP
PRESSURE exhaled flow
110
SIGH PEEP/CPAP cmH2O SET RATE bpm LOW EXHALED
TIDAL VOLUME
rate
LOW EXHALED
PLATEAU MINUTE VOLUME
50
Displays HIGH RESPIRATORY
cmH2O
indicated 90 PEAK FLOW lpm O2 % I:E
pressure APNEA
40
LOW PRESSURE
Displays
O2 INLET
LOW PRESSURE
prompts and
70 MEAN PEAK
AIRWAY
PRESSURE
AIRWAY
PRESSURE
AIR INLET error codes
EXHALATION
30 VALVE LEAK
PLATEAU LOW BATTERY
PRESSURE
Displays area 50 PEAK
TIDAL RESPIRATORY
7 8 9
ratio RATE/I:E
FLOW
VENT INOP
20
4 5 6
VENTILATOR Indicates
ALARM
When reviewing 30
SENSITIVITY O2 % PLATEAU presence of
CAUTION
1 2 3 errors during
previous errors, HIGH LOW LOW BACK UP
causes display 10
RATE I:E PRESSURE
LIMIT
INSPIRATION
PRESSURE
PEEP/CPAP
PRESSURE
VENTILATOR previous and
bpm RATIO 0
of address being 10
* SAFETY current EST
LOW LOW HIGH
executed when liters
EXHALED EXHALED RESPIRATORY
ENTER CLEAR
VALVE OPEN
runs
NORMAL
error occurred 0
CMV SIMV CPAP LAMP

TEST
Causes display
of error codes in
Displays SPONT.
MINUTE
VOLUME
MINUTE 100% O2
SUCTION ALARM memory
tubing system VOLUME SILENCE
compliance PRESSURE
SCALE TIDAL MANUAL MANUAL AUTOMATIC NEBULIZER ALARM
Causes display
HIGH/LOW VOLUME INSPIRATION SIGH SIGH
RESET
of previous EST
data
2-00296
Figure 5-8. Enhanced-Plus Keyboard Controls and Indicators Used in EST
PATIENT DATA VENTILATOR SETTINGS VENTILATOR Displays lift-off

Displays lift-off STATUS current (test 557),
current (test 557), PEEP/CPAP
TIDAL VOL. liters HIGH PRESSURE or oxygen volume
or oxygen volume LIMIT
LOW INSPIRATORY or flow
or flow PRESSURE
LOW PEEP/CPAP
PRESSURE
LOW EXHALED
SET RATE bpm TIDAL VOLUME Displays
AIRWAY PRESSURE LOW EXHALED
Displays MINUTE VOLUME exhaled flow
indicated
HIGH RESPIRATORY
RATE rate
pressure PEAK FLOW lpm O2% I:E
APNEA
cmH2O
LOW PRESSURE
O2 INLET
LOW PRESSURE
Displays
AIR INLET
prompts and
EXHALATION
Displays area MEAN PEAK
VALVE LEAK error codes
AIRWAY AIRWAY
ratio PRESSURE PRESSURE LOW BATTERY

PEEP/ PLATEAU VOLUME RATE INSPIRATORY VENT INOP
CPAP PRESSURE FLOW
VENTILATOR
Indicates
When reviewing ALARM
ASSIST
RATE/I:E SENSITIVITY O2 % PLATEAU
presence of
previous errors, CAUTION
errors during
causes display SPONTANEOUS HIGH LOW LOW BACK UP
PRESSURE INSPIRATION PEEP/CPAP VENTILATOR previous and
of address being LIMIT PRESSURE PRESSURE
SIGH
SAFETY current EST
executed when LOW LOW HIGH
RATE I:E EXHALED EXHALED RESPIRATORY
VALVE OPEN
runs
error occurred PLATEAU bpm RATIO TIDAL VOL MINUTE VOL RATE
ENTER CLEAR
NORMAL
liters
CMV SIMV CPAP LAMP
TEST
Causes display
of error codes in
100% O2
SUCTION ALARM memory
SILENCE
Displays Causes display
SPONT. MANUAL MANUAL AUTOMATIC
tubing system TIDAL
VOLUME
MINUTE
VOLUME
MINUTE
VOLUME
INSPIRATION SIGH SIGH
NEBULIZER ALARM
RESET of previous EST
compliance data
2-00297
Figure 5-9. Enhanced Keyboard Controls and Indicators Used in EST
5 Self-Tests
Displays indicated PATIENT DATA Displays

pressure cmH2O RATE/I:E area ratio
Displays lift-off MEAN PEAK When reviewing

current (test 557), AIRWAY
PRESSURE
AIRWAY
PRESSURE
RATE
bpm
I:E
RATIO
previous errors,
or oxygen volume PEEP/CPAP
causes display
liters
or flow ASSIST SPONTANEOUS
PEEP/
CPAP
PLATEAU
PRESSURE of address being
executed when
Displays lift-off AIRWAY
PRESSURE
EXHALED
VOLUME SIGH PLATEAU TIDAL MINUTE SPONT.
MINUTE
error occurred
VOLUME VOLUME
cmH2O liters VOLUME
current (test 557),
or air volume or VENTILATOR
Displays
VENTILATOR
flow STATUS SETTINGS tubing system
VENTILATOR HIGH LOW LOW compliance
INOPERATIVE PRESSURE EXHALED PRESSURE
LIMIT TIDAL VOL O2 INLET TIDAL VOL. liters SET RATE bpm
ALARM
LOW LOW LOW

Displays
INSPIRATORY EXHALED PRESSURE
Indicates presence
CAUTION PRESSURE MINUTE VOL AIR INLET exhaled
of errors during PEAK FLOW lpm O2%
flow rate
BACK UP VENTILATOR LOW HIGH
LOW
previous and PEEP/CPAP
PRESSURE
RESPIRATORY
RATE
BATTERY
Displays
current EST runs SAFETY VALVE OPEN
EXHALATION
prompts and
APNEA I:E VALVE
NORMAL
LEAK error codes
FLOW
ALARM ALARM LAMP
SILENCE RESET TEST
Causes display
of error codes
MANUAL MANUAL AUTOMATIC HIGH LOW LOW
in memory
100% O2 NEBULIZER
SUCTION INSPIRATION SIGH SIGH PRESSURE INSPIRATION PEEP/CPAP
2-00298
LOW LOW HIGH
CMV SIMV CPAP EXHALED
TIDAL VOL
EXHALED
MINUTE VOL
RESPIRATORY
RATE ENTER CLEAR Causes display
of previous
EST data
Figure 5-10. Basic Keyboard Controls and Indicators Used in EST
5.3.4 Error Handling

Follow these procedures if an EST test fails or if the entire EST fails.
5.3.4.1 If an EST Test Fails

When EST detects a hardware malfunction, it displays
xxyz ERR
Take one of these actions:
• Stop error message from scrolling by pressing < > or <ENTER> after the message has
begun scrolling. This causes just the error code to be displayed.
• Exit EST by pressing <ALARM RESET>. Continue pressing <ENTER> until error message
display is completed. Correct the problem and rerun EST by powering up the ventilator.
(Refer to Section 6 for information on interpreting and responding to error codes.)
• Repeat last test step by pressing < > twice, followed by <ENTER>.
• Repeat last test sequence by using the < > key to scroll backwards to any test, then
pressing <ENTER>.
• Resume testing after a failure by pressing < > or <ENTER>, then <ENTER>.
• Continue testing at beginning of EST by pressing <ALARM SILENCE>.
Self-Tests 5
5.3.4.2 If the Entire EST Fails
Warning
Do not use a ventilator that has failed EST without verifying its operational integrity by
means other than EST and determining that the patient will not be placed at risk.
After EST fails, it displays one of these messages. Respond as indicated.
Prompt Response
EST FAIL EST failed one or more critical tests. Do one of the following:
• Rerun EST at the beginning by pressing <ALARM SILENCE>.
• Repair the ventilator by checking errors in battery-backed RAM
(Section 5.3.9), powering down ventilator, repairing the malfunction,
and powering up the ventilator to re-invoke EST.
• Resume ventilation by pressing <ENTER> after verifying the operational
integrity of the ventilator by means independent of EST.
[OVERRIDE-ENTER] will be displayed.
Press <ENTER>.
EST COMPLETE Either EST passed all critical tests, but failed one or more noncritical tests; or
EST was exited at operator request (<ALARM RESET>). Press <ENTER>.
[OVERRIDE-ENTER] will be displayed. You may press <ENTER> to resume
ventilation.
5.3.5 Exiting EST

You can exit EST either after a test fails or at the end of EST. You cannot exit EST while tests
are running.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to bypass EST by turning the ventilator power switch off and back on.
5.3.5.1 During Test Routine Execution

Exit EST while it is running by pressing <ALARM RESET> then <ENTER>, either during
operator prompting or during error message display.
• If there are no unresolved errors, normal ventilator operation resumes.
• If there are unresolved errors, take one of these actions:
• Resume ventilation by pressing <ENTER> in response to [OVERRIDE-ENTER] prompt.
Press <ENTER> again. The bypass condition and codes of all errors detected during this
pass of EST are logged into battery-backed RAM.
• Continue EST at the beginning by pressing a key other than <ENTER> in response to the
[OVERRIDE-ENTER] prompt.
5 Self-Tests
5.3.5.2 After the Completion of EST

When EST passes, it displays one of the following messages. Respond as indicated.
Prompt Response
TEST AC ALARM Disconnect power cord and verify audible power fail alarm. Reconnect
power cord. Wait for POST to run and [REVIEW APNEA PARAMS] to be
displayed.
NOTE:
When returning the ventilator to operation after EST, always wait
until the ventilator displays [REVIEW APNEA PARAMS]. Do not turn
the ventilator power switch off and on. If you do so, [RUN EST-DO
NOT USE] will be displayed and BUV will start.
If power fail alarm does not sound during ac alarm test, remove ventilator
from operation, and troubleshoot it, referring to Section 7.8, step AF.
NOTE:
Puritan Bennett recommends you always perform the ac alarm test
after EST. It is possible to skip the test, however, by pressing <CLEAR>
in response to this prompt.
If EST fails or is incomplete, it displays this message. Respond as indicated.
Prompt Response
EST FAIL or EST failed one or more tests or it was exited at operator request. See
EST COMPLETE Section 5.3.4 to respond to this prompt.
5.3.6 Restarting EST

Restart EST as follows:
• If the [RUN EST-DO NOT USE] message is displayed, press <EST>. The [RUN EST-DO
NOT USE] message indicates EST was interrupted. When this message is displayed, the
ventilator also goes into BUV.
• During a test fail condition or during error code review, press <ALARM SILENCE>, then
<ENTER>. The ALARM light, if lit, will be turned off and the CAUTION light will be lit.
5.3.7 Printing an EST Status Report

Ventilators with the Digital Communications Interface (DCI) option active and a printer
properly connected can generate an EST status report, shown in Figure 5-11. The report can
be printed either after EST is completed or at any time during normal ventilator operation.
5.3.7.1 What the Report Includes

• The report contains information on the most recent EST execution. This information
includes:
• test number, title, pass/fail status, and error codes for tests that failed
• tubing compliance
• area ratio of the exhalation valve at selected pressures
Self-Tests 5
• current status codes in battery-backed RAM
• overall result of the most recent EST: whether the ventilator passed or failed the test
5.3.7.2 Generating The Report

To generate the report, select DCI (Option 20), then scroll through the functions to access
Function 26. Respond to the messages as indicated below:
Press The 20-character display reads: Response
<26> 26 EST Status
<ENTER> PRINTER EST STATUS Press <ENTER> to request a printout EST

status report. Press <CLEAR> to return to the
[26 EST STATUS] message.
<ENTER> Press <++> to step to another DI function, or

press any VENTILATOR SETTINGS key to
return to current settings.
For additional information on using the DCI option, see the Digital Communication Interface
(DCI) Appendix to the 7200 Series Ventilatory System Operator’s Manual. Refer to Section 1.10 of
this manual for the part number.
5 Self-Tests
TIME: 08:50 VENTILATOR SERIAL # DATE: NOV 30 1999

************************ EST RESULTS ***************************************
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TEST CONDITION ERROR CODE
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
51 TEST BBR PASSED
52 AUTOZERO PRESS TRANSDUCERS PASSED
53 CHECK PATIENT ATTACHED PASSED
54 LEAK TEST PASSED
55 TEST Q2 VS Q3 PASSED
56 TEST Q1 VS Q3 ******
57 COMPLIANCE/SAFETY VALVE PASSED
58 AREA RATIO/PEEP PASSED
59 TEST NEBULIZER ******
60 TEST COMPRESSOR ******
61 TEST BUV ******
62 TEST FRONT PANEL ******
63 TEST DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS ******
TUBING COMPLIANCE 4.10 ml/cmH2O ****** = TEST NOT RUN

TUBING LEAK 7.7 cmH2O/10 SEC (QUICK EST)
AREA RATIO
35 cmH2O 1.42
30 cmH2O 1.44
20 cmH2O 1.48
15 cmH2O 1.51
10 cmH2O 1.52
5 cmH2O 1.54
2 cmH2O 1.54
AVERAGE 1.49
BBR STATUS
1 0000 000000000000 00000000
2 0000 000000000000 00000000
3 0000 000000000000 00000000
4 0000 000000000000 00000000
5 0000 000000000000 00000000
6 0000 000000000000 00000000
EST LAST RUN NOV 29 1999 09:44

***** EST PASSED *****
Figure 5-11. EST Status Report
5.3.8 Viewing Data from Most Recent EST Run

Follow the procedures below to view data from the most recent EST run. The data includes
the date and time (24-hour clock) when EST was last run, the EST status (pass, complete, or
fail), leak data, the exhalation valve area ratio, and tubing compliance.
On a ventilator with a 7202 Display, complete data is displayed by pressing <0>. Partial
information about the most recent EST run is part of the screen that automatically comes up
when EST is invoked (Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6).
On a ventilator without a 7202 Display, view this data by pressing <0> while the [QUICK
EST] or [TOTAL EST] prompt is displayed. This data scrolls across the 20-character display
until you press another key.
EST may report error information, both about test errors and operator errors, using the
20-character message display and the 7202 Display, if present.
Self-Tests 5
5.3.9 Viewing Previous Error Codes
NOTE:
To start EST at its beginning while you are reviewing error codes, press <ALARM SILENCE>.
The ventilator can store data on the six most recent errors detected by EST. This error data is
stored in battery-backed RAM. It includes the error codes and the date and time the errors
were detected. The error code display takes this form:
xxyz ERR mmdd hhmm
where:
xxyz is the error code
mmdd is the month and day the error was detected
hhmm is the hour and minute the error was detected
On a ventilator with a 7202 Display, this information is part of the screen that
automatically comes up when EST begins (Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6).
On a ventilator without a 7202 Display, view this error data by pressing a number in the
range <1> through <6> in response to the [QUICK EST] or [TOTAL EST] prompt. <1> stands
for the most recently detected and <6> stands for the least recently detected error. If no errors
were detected, [NULL ERR] is displayed.
When certain errors, such as some soft errors, are detected, the address being executed when
the error occurred is also stored in battery-backed RAM. For errors 48F8 through 48FF, these
addresses may prove helpful in diagnosing the origin of the problem.
To make use of these addresses, get to the [QUICK EST] prompt, then press <1> and the
<RATE bpm> key in the upper right-hand corner of the keyboard. Make note of the 12-digit
number in the 20-character display. Do this for locations 1 through 6. If two or more of the
addresses you retrieve are identical, do the following:
1. Break the address into three sets of four digits. (For example, [40A361010100] would be
broken into 40A3/6101/0100).
2. Multiply the first set by 10H. (For example, 40A3H x 10H = 40A30H.)
3. Add the second set to this value. (For example, 40A30 H + 6101H = 46B31H.)
4. Look at the appropriate memory map in Table 5-12 or Table 5-13 to determine the
corresponding suspect part. (For example, if the ventilator is 80188-based, 64B31H could
represent faulty software.)
5 Self-Tests
Table 5-12: 80188-Based Ventilator Memory Map
Address range Suspected hardware location
00000 -7FFFF Software (on CPU PCB)

80000 -8FFFF CPU PCB
90000 -903FF Conversion PCB
90400 -90FFF Reserved for future expansion
91000 -92FFF DCI-display controller PCB
94000 -943FF DCI-display controller PCB
94400 -947FF Pulse oximetry PCB
98000 -9FFFF Pulse oximetry PCB
A0000 -AFFFF CPU PCB
B0000 -BFFFF CPU PCB
C0000 -C7FFF Reserved for future expansion
C8000 -F7FFF CPU PCB
F8000 -FFFFF Software (on CPU PCB)
Table 5-13: 8088-Based Ventilator Memory Map
Address range Suspected hardware location
00000 - 05FFF CPU PCB or software

06000 -13FFF Does not exist
14000 -15FFF CPU PCB
16000 -17FFF Does not exist
18000 -27FFF Memory PCB
28000 -28FFF CPU PCB
29000 -2FFFF Q1 and Q2
30000 -8FFFF Memory PCB or software
90000 -9003F Conversion PCB
90040 -93FFF Conversion PCB
94000 -97FFF Display controller PCB
98000 -FF7FF Display controller PCB
FF800 -FFFFF CPU PCB
5.3.10 Clearing Error Codes from Battery-Backed RAM

EST error codes may be cleared from battery-backed RAM either when the code is first
displayed or while error codes are being reviewed. To clear an error code, do the following
while the [QUICK EST] or [TOTAL EST] prompt is displayed.
1. Press a key in the range <1> through <6> to display the applicable code.
2. Press <LAMP TEST>.
3. Press <ENTER>. The error code and any associated information, such as a memory address,
will be cleared.

Ventilador 7200 Manual Servicio PDF

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Ventilador 7200 Manual Servicio PDF

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

7200 Service Manual

Part No. 066317

066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual i

ii 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)

iv 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual v

vi 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

9 Repair: Cabinet Assembly

10 Repair: Pneumatic Chassis Assembly

066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual ix

11 Repair: Power Supply Assembly

12 Repair: Utility Panel Assembly

x 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

14 Repair: Card Cage Assembly

15 Repair: Console Assembly

066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xi

17 Repair: Ventilator Pedestal Assembly

19 Repair: Panels and Connector Bracket

7200 Series Ventilatory System Assemblies and Accessories Parts List

B 7200 Series Ventilatory System

D Pneumatic Chassis Assembly

E Power Supply Assembly

066317 Rev. A (03/04) 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual xv

G Exhalation Compartment Assembly

H Card Cage Assembly

J Connector Bracket Assemblies

K Ventilator Cabinet Assembly

L Back Panel Assembly

M Compressor Pedestal Assembly

O Ventilator Cart Assembly

Alphabetical and Numerical Parts Index

This page is intentionally blank.

Figure 1-1. 7200 Series Ventilatory System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

xx 7200 Series Ventilator System Service Manual 066317 Rev. A (03/04)

This page is intentionally blank.

Table 1-1. Ventilator Model Characteristics .................................................................................................. 1-4

This page is intentionally blank.

1.2 General Product Description

1.3 Configuration Information

1.3.1 Configuration Differences

Figure 1-1. 7200 Series Ventilatory System

1.3.2 Model Differences

Table 1-1: Ventilator Model Characteristics

7200ae 80188 Enhanced-Plus Bottom- Internal Console says “7200 series

7200spe 80188 Enhanced-Plus Bottom- Internal Console says “7200 series

7200e 80188 Enhanced-Plus Bottom- External Console says “7200 series

1.3.3 Viewing Ventilator Software Information

MegaCPU PCB installed? (May not be

In 8088-based ventilators (which are no longer manufactured), software information is

aaa nnnnn-85-r xyz

(ventilator model/keyboard type)

• 7250 Metabolic Monitor. Measures O2 consumption and CO2 production of patients on

Table 1-2: Specifications for Compatible Printer

Print method Inkjet or impact dot matrix

Printing pitch 80 characters per line (normal),

Line spacing 6 lines per inch

Paper size 8.5 x 11 inches

Paper feed Continuous (pin) feed or friction feed

Graphics Epson FX-85 compatible

Table 1-3: Special Hardware Requirements for Options

Pressure Support None.

Respiratory Mechanics/ None.